Home

User`s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R 1

1. 21 41 6l 81101121 1141161181201 221241 t ooo tae a H 4 11 31 SI 71 91111 113115117119121123 1 1211 122 1231 1241 Username admin Password WGSW 24040R 75 Figure 5 1 Managed Switch Console Login screen For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup Only accept command in lowercase letter under console interface 335 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Configure IP address The SGSW Managed Switch is shipped with default IP address as following IP Address 192 168 0 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 To check the current IP address or modify a new IP address for the Switch please use the procedures as follow E Show the current IP address 1 On WGSW 24040 gt prompt enter ip configuration 2 The screen displays the current IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway As show in Figure 5 2 COM1 115200baud Tera Term YT File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help t 21 41 6l 8116 12 1141161181201221241 Hootootootoo oo too4 ee 11 31 SI 71 91111 11311511 119 1211231 1211 122 1231 124 admin d Login in prog IP Configuration abled Link Local Address fe80 230 4f f f fe55 6644 IPv6 Address 192 168 8 100 IPv6 Pref ix
2. Figure 4 18 11 Loop protection configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Data Source The port ID which wants to be monitored e Drop The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network e Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received e Broad cast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address e Multi cast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address e CRC Errors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets e Under size The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets e Over size The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets e Frag The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid 331 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R CRC e Jabb The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Coll The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment e 64 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length e 65 127 The total numb
3. Syntax System Load Example To show current CPU load WGSW 24040 gt system load Load average 100ms 1s 10s 1 1 1 347 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 2 IP Command IP Configuration Description Show IP configuration Syntax IP Configuration Example Show IP configuration WGSW 24040 gt ip configuration IP Configuration DHCP Client Disabled IP Address 192 168 0 101 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 0 254 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 VLAN ID a DNS Proxy Disabled IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Address fe80 230 4fff fe11 2233 IPv6 Address 1 192 168 0 100 IPv6 Prefix 96 IPv6 Router Active Configuration for IPv6 Static with Stateless IPv6 Address fe80 2 230 4fff fe11 2233 64 Scope Link Status UP RUNNING Enabled MTU 1500 LinkMTU is 1500 IPv6 Address 192 168 0 100 96 Scope Global Status UP RUNNING Enabled MTU 1500 LinkMTU is 1500 WGSW 24040 gt 348 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R IP DHCP Description Set or show the DHCP client mode Syntax IP DHCP enable disable Parameters enable Enable or renew DHCP client disable Disable DHCP client Default Setting Disable Example Disable DHCP sever WGSW 24040 gt ip dhcp disable IP Setup Description Set or show the IP setup Syntax IP Setup lt ip addr gt lt ip_mask gt lt ip_router gt lt vid gt Parame
4. Click to save changes Save Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Reset Return to the previous page Cancel 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE 4 appears 10 The ACL Ports Configuration screen in Figure 4 ACL Ports Configuration ia my nfo a H mk a ra sa i En En En D ial my ma T m i am p ml ma my slo a cx D a a a mil m lt Al gt lt 4lb All lt All w Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled w Disabled w Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled w Disabled Disabled w Disabled w Disabled Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled Disabled w Disabled w Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled a 0 Pent v wt wt koa w wt 3031 wt wt wt wt wt wt w Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disab
5. En Printers h CNS him Domain Controller Security Policy o Help an a Domain Security Policy Event Viewer HyperTerminal Internet Authentication Service Ethereal Windows Catalog Windows Update Internet Information Services 115 Manager Licensing Accessories b Manage Your Server e Internet Explor Startup Microsoft MET Framework 1 1 Configuration Microsoft MET Framework 1 1 Wizards Metwork Load Balancing Manager Internet Explorer Outlook Express Remote Assistance Performance Administrative Tools Remote Desktops IxChariot b Routing and Remote Access All Programs Sree Sepia 1 i c 2 c lem E E a Mal Sle SI Terminal Server Licensing Log ea Terminal Services Configuration A start Ej 8 E ir Terminal Services Manager LEDE 9 13 PM Figure 4 11 15 Windows 2003 AD server setting path Te Enter Active Directory Users and Computers create legal user data the next right click a user what you created to enter properties and what to be noticed 259 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R New Object User x Create imn catestpo Users First name test Initials Last name Full name test User logon name test Sica test pe le User logon name pre Windowe Z000 Can test Back Lancel Figure 4 11 16 Add User Properties screen New Object User i x Create ir ca test po Users Password
6. ir address state O 0 0 0 1813 Disabled O 0 0 0 1813 Disabled O 0 0 0 1813 Disabled O 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 000 0 0 1013 Disabled Auto refresh Figure 4 11 8 RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview page screenshot iE 2 3 4 2 The page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Servers Object Description o H The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server e State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values E Disabled The server is disabled E Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running a Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled 248 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R RADIUS Accounting Servers Object Description o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and U
7. lt dip gt lt icmp_type gt lt icmp_code gt lt ip_flags gt udp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags gt tcp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags gt lt tcp_flags gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_redirect gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 512 default Next available ID lt ace_id next gt Next ACE ID 1 512 default Add ACE last port Port ACE keyword lt port gt Port number or all policy Policy ACE keyword lt policy gt Policy number 0 255 lt policy_bitmask gt Policy number bitmask Ox0 OxFF lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any lt tag_prio gt VLAN tag priority 0 7 or any lt dmac_type gt DMAC type any unicast multicast broadcast etype Ethernet Type keyword lt etype gt Ethernet Type 0x600 OxFFFF or any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 Ox806 ARP and 0x86DD IPv6 lt smac gt Source MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XX XX XX XX XX XX OT XXXXXXXXXXXX X is a hexadecimal digit or any lt dmac gt Destination MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX X S a hexadecimal digit or any arp ARP keyword lt sip gt Source IP address a b c d n or any lt dip gt Destination IP address a b c d n or any lt arp_opcode gt ARP operation code anylarp rarplother lt
8. 4 Select Authentication tab 5 Select Enable network access control using IEEE 802 1X to enable 802 1x authentication 6 Select MD 5 Challenge from the drop down list box for EAP type 261 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R JCOM 30940 Properties General Authentication Advanced Select this option to provide authenticated network access hor Ethernet networks Enable IEEE 802 1 authentication for this network EAP type Protected EAP FEAF w MD5S Challenge Protected EAF FEAF Smart Card or other Certificate Authenticate az computer when computer information is available Authenticate as quest when user or computer information is unavailable Figure 4 11 19 7 Click OK 8 When client has associated with the Managed Switch a user authentication notice appears in system tray Click on the notice to continue i Local Area Connection 3 x Click here to enter your user name and password For the network 10 15 PM Figure 4 11 20 Windows client popup login request message 262 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 9 Enter the user name password and the logon domain that your account belongs 10 Click OK to complete the validation process Local Area Connection 3 User name test Logon domain Figure 4 11 21 263 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 12 Security This section is to control the access of the Manag
9. 4 2 14 SMTP Configuration This page facilitates a SMTP Configure the switch The SMTP Configure screen in Figure 4 2 17 appears 67 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SMTP Configuration SMTP Server fplanetcomiw ie 128 Digits SMTP Authentication Enable Authentication User Hame E b4 Digits Authentication Password is 21 Digits SMTP Mode Enable E mail Subject lt b4 Digits E mail 1 To lt 125 Digits E mail To lt 128 Digits The page includes the following fields Object e SMTP Mode e SMTP Server e SMTP Port e SMTP Authentication e Authentication User Name e Authentication Password e E mail From e E mail Subject e E mail 1 To e E mail 2 To Buttons Figure 4 2 17 SMTP Configuration page screenshot Description Controls whether SMTP is enabled on this switch Type the SMTP server name or the IP address of the SMTP server Set port number of SMTP service Controls whether SMTP authentication is enabled If authentication is required when an e mail is sent Type the user name for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable Type the password for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable Type the sender s E mail address This address is used for reply e mails Type the subject title of the e mail Type the receiver s e mail address est Send a test mail to mail server to check this account is available or not Save Click to save changes Reset
10. DHCP Relay Mode Disabled DHCP Relay Server NULL DHCP Relay Information Mode Disabled DHCP Relay Information Policy replace Security Network DHCP Relay Mode Description 434 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Set or show the DHCP relay mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP relaly mode When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security considered disable Disable DHCP relaly mode default Show flow DHCP relaly mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DHCP relay mode WGSW 24040 gt security network dhcp relay mode enable Security Network DHCP Relay Server Description Show or set DHCP relay server Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Server lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address Default Setting null Example Set DHCP relay server in 192 168 0 20 WGSW 24040 gt security network dhcp relay server 192 168 0 20 435 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode Description Set or show DHCP relay agent information option mode When enable DHCP relay information mode operation the agent insert specific information option 82 into a
11. Independent vlan learning e Configurable PVID Indicates whether or not configurable PVID tagging is implemented Tagging 4 6 4 VLAN Port Configuration This page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration page All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch MM IEEE 802 10 Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged e Tagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions e Untagged Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant n
12. Inventory N O oO fF W N Reserved Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The poosible application types are shown below Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applicat
13. Parameters lt history_id gt History ID 1 65535 Security Switch RMON Alarm Add Description Add or modify RMON Alarm entry The entry index key is lt alarm_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON Alarm Add lt alarm_id gt lt interval gt lt alarm_vairable gt absolute delta lt rising_threshold gt lt rising_event_index gt lt falling_threshold gt lt falling_event_index gt rising falling both Parameters lt alarm_id gt Alarm ID 1 65535 lt interval gt Sampling interval 1 2147483647 default 30 lt alarm_vairable gt The MIB OID that need to be referenced 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 xxx iflnOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 11 xxx iflnUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 12 xxx iflnNUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 13 xxx iflnDiscards 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 14 xxx iflnErrors 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 15 xxx iflnUnkownProtos 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 xxx ifOutOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 17 xxx ifOutUcastPkts 412 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 18 xxx ifOutNUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 19 xxx ifOutDiscards 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 20 xxx ifOutErrors 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 21 xxx ifOutQLen xxx means the interface identified by a particular value of this index is the same interface as identified by the same value of OID iflndex absolute Get the sample directly delta Calculate the difference between samples default lt rising threshold gt Rising thresh
14. Parameters lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet Example Delete VLAN name WGSW 24040 gt vlan name delete test VLAN Name Lookup Description Show VLAN Name table Syntax VLAN Name Lookup lt name gt Parameters lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet Example To show VLAN Name table WGSW 24040 gt vlan name lookup 376 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R VLAN Status Description VLAN Port Configuration Status Syntax VLAN Status lt port_list gt combined static nas mvr voice_vian mstp all conflicts Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports combined combined VLAN Users configuration static static port configuration nas NAS port configuration mvr MVR port configuration voice_vlan Voice VLAN port configuration mstp MSTP port configuration vel VCL port configuration all All VLAN Users configuration default all VLAN Users configuration Example Show VLAN configuration of port1 WGSW 24040 gt status 1 Port VLAN User PortType PVID Frame Type Ing Filter Tx Tag Static Unaware Disabled Untag This NAS Voice VLAN Combined Unaware Disabled Untag This 1 3 7 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 W
15. When Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE Any No target IP filter is specified Target IP filter is don t care Host Target IP filter is set to Host Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears Network Target IP filter is set to Network Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address field THA settings 0 RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address length HLN and protocol address length PLN settings 0 ARP RARP fr
16. not constitute an error Software Image Selection Active Image Image managed Version Beta 208311331 Date 2012 08 311T13 31 59 0800 Alternate Image Image managed bk Version Beta 200241142 Date 2 01 00 44111 44 53 0000 Figure 4 2 26 Software Image Selection page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Image The flash index name of the firmware image The name of primary preferred image is image the alternate image is named image bk e Version The version of the firmware image e Date The date where the firmware was produced Buttons Activate Altemate Image Click to use the alternate image This button may be disabled depending on system state 74 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Cancel Cancel activating the backup image Navigates away from this page 4 2 20 Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the stack switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained The new configuration is available immediately which means that no restart is necessary The Factory Default screen in Figure 4 2 27 appears Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults The default configuration here doesnt involve IP address You can reset configuration included IP by means of pushing the reset button on the machine Figure 4 2 27 Factory Default page screenshot Buttons Yes _Yes Click to reset
17. Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed e Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes e Excessive Collision Configure port transmit collision behavior Mode a Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default a Restart Restart back off algorithm after 16 collisions e Power Control The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port a Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled E ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled a Dynamic Link up power savings enabled a Enabled Link up and link down power savings enabled When set each port to run at 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full and 10M Half speed modes The Auto MDIX function will disable Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the page Any changes made locally will be undone 89 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The Port Statistics Overview screen in Figure 4 4 2 appears Port Statistics Overview 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ll 0 0 U 0 3
18. Controls the rate for the policer The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps or fps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps or kfps Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate as kbps Mbps fps or kfps The default value is kbps If flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode then pause frames are sent instead of discarding frames 182 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 3 Port Classification This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports The Port Classification screen in Figure 4 9 2 appears Qos Ingress Port Classification pc lt Alb v lt A gt v QoS Class DP Level Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled OSS A ANA 4 SSIS AA S A A 4 olelolse o E AAA A AA 4 i 3 Z 4 E Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled ow Disabled Sa Figure 4 9 2 QoS Ingress Port Classification page screenshot ololololololal ANA ay 4 4 4 A o o llo o ol e Sl g Sjolle AAA A AA Sjolle AAA A AA k eh fefe fefe fe o 4 oO 4 4 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the configu
19. Description Set or show the STP Bridge protocol version Syntax STP Version lt stp_version gt Parameters lt stp_version gt mstp rstp stp Default Setting MSTP 450 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Set the STP Bridge protocol version WGSW 24040 gt stp version rstp STP Tx Hold Description Set or show the STP Bridge Transmit Hold Count parameter Syntax STP Txhold lt holdcount gt Parameters lt holdcount gt STP Transmit Hold Count 1 10 Default Setting 6 Example Set STP Tx hold in 10 WGSW 24040 gt stp txhold 10 STP MaxHops Description Set or show the MSTP Bridge Max Hop Count parameter Syntax STP MaxHops lt maxhops gt Parameters lt maxhops gt STP BPDU MaxHops 6 40 Default Setting 20 451 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Set STP maximum hops in 25 WGSW 24040 gt stp maxhops 25 STP MaxAge Description Set or show the bridge instance maximum age Syntax STP MaxAge lt max_age gt Parameters lt max_age gt STP maximum age time 6 40 and max_age lt forward_delay 1 2 Default Setting 20 Example Set STP maximum age time in 10 WGSW 24040 gt stp maxage 10 STP FwdDelay Description Set or show the bridge instance forward delay Syntax STP FwdDelay lt delay gt Parameters lt delay gt MSTP
20. Detailed Log Remote Syslog SMTP Configuration Web Firmware Upgrade TFTP Firmware Upgrade Configuration Backup Configuration Upload Image Select Factory Default System Reboot The switch system information is provided here Configure the switch managed IP information on this page Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser This page provides an overview of the privilege levels Configure NTP on this page Configure UPnP on this page Configure DHCP Relay on this page This page provides statistics for DHCP relay This page displays the CPU load using a SVG graph The switch system log information is provided here The switch system detailed log information is provided here Configure remote syslog on this page Configuration SMTP parameters on this page This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch Upgrade the firmware via TFTP server You can save the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags You can load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags Configuration active or alternate firmware on this page You can reset the configuration of the stack switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained You can r
21. PLANET Networking Communication User s Manual 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 Shared SFP Gigabit Switch gt WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MA nee paint T ATT TIA i Ah ji Title tebe VAN he Www PLANET com tw User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Trademarks Copyright O PLANET Technology Corp 2012 Contents subject to which revision without prior notice PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find information in t
22. Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Direction Name IEEE Name Rx Access dot1xAuthBackendAcce Challenges ssChallenges Rx Other dot1xAuthBackendOther Requests Requests ToSupplicant 241 Description 802 1 X based Counts the number of times that the switch receives the first request from the backend server following the first response from the supplicant Indicates that the backend server has communication with the switch MAC based Counts all Access Challenges received from the backend server for this port left most table or client right most table 802 1 X based Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP Request packet following the first to the supplicant Indicates that the backend server chose an EAP method MAC based Rx Auth Successes Rx Auth Failures Tx Responses 242 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R dot1xAuthBackendAuth Successes dot1xAuthBackendAuth Fails dot1xAuthBackendResp onses Not applicable 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a success indication Indicates that the supplicant client has successfully authenticated to the backend server 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a failure message This indicates that the supplicant client has not authenticated to the backend server 802 1X based Counts the number of times
23. This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Logon to the Console Once the terminal has connected to the device power on the Managed Switch the terminal will display that it is running testing procedures Then the following message asks the login username amp password The factory default password as following and the login screen in Figure 5 1 appears Username admin Password admin COM1 115200baud Tera Term YT File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help RedBoot tm bootstrap and debug environment ROMRAM Non certified release version 1_12 Vitesse built 13 54 00 May 8 2012 Copyright C 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 Free Software Foundat ion Inc RedBoot is free software covered by the eCos license derived from the GNU General Public License You are welcome to change it and or distribute copies of it under certain cona Lt LONS Under the license terms RedBoot s source code and full license must have been made available to you Redboot comes with ABSOLUTELY O MARRANTY tform VCore III MIPS32 24KEc LUTONZ6 RAM Ox SO000 BDO Ox88000000 14x80020e08 0x87fe1000 availablel FLASH 0x40000000 0x40fff4ff 256 x Ux10000 blocks Executing boot iia ina 000 seconds enter C to abort RedBoot gt fis load d m Image loaded from x80044 sd Ox 808e 7a60 RedBoot gt go Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers WGSW 24040R
24. WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp user delete 1 Security Switch SNMP User Changekey Description Change SNMPv3 user password Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Changekey lt engineid gt lt user_name gt lt auth_password gt lt priv_password gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all f H and is restricted to 5 32 octet string lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt auth_password gt A string identifying the authentication pass phrase lt priv_password gt A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 40 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Delete SNMPv3 user entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp user changekey 800007e501 7f000003 admin_snmpv3 404 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 87654321 12345678 Security Switch SNMP User Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 user entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 user entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp user lookup Idx Engine ID User Name Remote admin_snmpv3 Number of entries 1 Security Switch SNMP Group Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3
25. default All ports enable Enable Immediate Leave disable Disable Immediate Leave default Show MVR Immediate Leave MVR Status Description Show Clear MVR operational status Syntax MVR Status lt vid gt clear Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 clear Clear log MVR Groups Description Show MVR group addresses Syntax MVR Groups lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 MVR SFM Description Show SFM including SSM related information for MVR Syntax 914 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MVR SFM lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 915 6 19 Voice VLAN Command Voice VLAN Configuration Description Show Voice VLAN configuration Syntax Voice VLAN Configuration Example Show Voice VLAN configuration WGSW 24040 gt voice vlan configuration V oice VLAN Configuration Disabled Voice VLAN VLAN ID 1000 Voice VLAN Age Time seconds 86400 Voice VLAN Traffic Class 7 Voice VLAN OUI Table PLANET phones Cisco phones H3C phones Philips and NEC AG phones Pingtel phones Polycom phones 3Com phones Siemens AG phones Voice VLAN Port Configuration 916 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Port Mode 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 k O Disabled Disabled Di
26. gt pvlan lookup 379 PVLANID Ports User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R PVLAN Isolate Description Set or show the port isolation mode Syntax PVLAN Isolate lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port isolation disable Disable port isolation default Show port isolation port list Default Setting disable Example Enable isolate for port10 WGSW 24040 gt pvlan isolate 10 enable 380 6 7 Security Command Security Switch User Configuration Description Show users configuration Syntax Security Switch Users Configuration Default Setting User Name Privilege admin 15 Example Show users configuration WGSW 24040 gt security switch user configuration Users Configuration Security Switch User Add Description Add or modify users entry Syntax User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Switch Users Add lt user_name gt lt password gt lt privilege_level gt Parameters lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores lt password gt lt privilege_level gt User privilege level 1 15 The password for this user name The allowed string length is 0 32 Use clear or 381 as nu
27. path with the minimum cost as the active ports path Default Spanning Tree Configuration Feature Enable state Port priority Port cost Bridge Priority O Auto Default Value STP disabled for all ports 128 0 32 768 139 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R User Changeable STA Parameters The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from O to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge E The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Note Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it w
28. 00000 E ll a O 173549 Figure 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview page screenshot The displayed counters are Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port e Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port e Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port e Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion e Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 90 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 4 3 Port Statistics Detail This page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The selected port belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit The Port Statistics Detail screen in Figure 4 4 3 appears Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Por v Auto refresh F Receive Total Transmit Total Rx Packets Rx Octets Rx Unicast
29. 1 4095 or Name Maximum of 32 characters mvr_param_llqi 1 Default Value 5 0 31744 Last Listener Query Interval in tenths of seconds default Show MVR Interface Last Listener Query Interval 912 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MVR VLAN Channel Description Set or show per MVR VLAN channel Syntax MVR VLAN Channel lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt add dellupd channel channel_bound Name lt grp_name gt Parameters lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt MVR VLAN ID 1 4095 or Name Maximum of 32 characters add Add operation del Delete operation upd Update operation channel IPv4 IPv6 multicast group address channel bound The boundary IPv4 IPv6 multicast group address for the channel name MVR Name keyword lt grp_name gt MVR Channel name Maximum of 32 characters MVR VLAN Priority Description Set or show per MVR VLAN priority and VLAN tag Syntax MVR VLAN Priority lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt priority tagged untagged Parameters lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt MVR VLAN ID 1 4095 or Name Maximum of 32 characters priority CoS priority value ranges from 0 7 tagged Tagged IGMP MLD frames will be sent untagged Untagged IGMP MLD frames will be sent MVR Immediate Leave Description Set or show MVR immediate leave per port Syntax 913 MVR Immediate Leave lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt lt port_list gt Port list or all
30. 410 Syntax Security Switch RMON Statistics Delete lt stats_id gt Parameters lt stats_id gt Statistics ID 1 65535 Security Switch RMON Statistics Lookup Description Show RMON Statistics entries Syntax Security Switch RMON Statistics Lookup lt stats_id gt Parameters lt stats_id gt Statistics ID 1 65535 Security Switch RMON History Add Description User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Add or modify RMON Hisotry entry The entry index key is lt history_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON History Add lt history_id gt lt data_source gt lt interval gt lt buckets gt Parameters lt history_id gt History ID 1 65535 lt data_source gt The OID that indicates that the iflndex in ifEntry The value should be like 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 xxx lt interval gt lt buckets gt Security Switch RMON History Delete Description Sampling interval 1 3600 default 1800 The maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON 1 65535 default 50 Delete RMON Hisotry entry The entry index key is lt history_id gt 411 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Syntax Security Switch RMON History Delete lt history_id gt Parameters lt history_id gt History ID 1 65535 Security Switch RMON History Lookup Description Show RMON History entries Syntax Security Switch RMON History Lookup lt history_id gt
31. 49 6 1 005 Egress Port Tag REMArkINO si it A A ed AS 189 O aes ee eat ass ah sa cate pean t Deena acdessans aaa a a a a a A R cacietecae fat eee 190 498 DSCP Based OCS ica cee sda ceescac cesses soc eeed E became duced ae eaat odwesaongagugse lod EROR 191 AOD S CR Mania ON AAA ASAS AAA AA 193 49 TO DSOP 61 EII ers 1110 y CORA A OOO o NY 194 AO WOES CONTO tido as 195 4 9 11 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration cccoocnncccoccncccnnnnononnnnononnnnonnrnnononcnnonnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrinnnns 197 AS A A O ene ee eee eee 199 49 13 Storm CONO GOnMGUrallOn A ei ieee ae 201 A919 QOS SlAUSUCS ia aii 201 A 9 16 Voice VLAN Conm mng uration ia 202 A OAT VOICE VEAN OU VAG ia 204 A 10 ACCESS Control ISS ii A 206 ANOTA RECESS SONT OL LISD Stats e et e e a O 206 4 10 2 Access Control List ConfigQuraliOn sense iw as 207 A a Sakids sdb eatnds abate tates es barics ante aa ide aoaela erties 209 AOA ACE POMS COMIquUTalO Nr nia tatiana dla ti daa 218 ANOS AGL Rate EimiterE onu tl dl E NS 220 41d PUREST AUTON ia a adonde 222 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authenticati0N cooooccconccconcnccnocnconcnconcnconononnncnnnnrononcnnoncnconaninonnnss 223 A 11 2 AUMNentcaton Contigura tOdO iS 226 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 11 3 Network Access Server CONfIgUFatiON occccooococcconnococononcncnconoconcnnonononononrnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnrnnornnnnnonnnnnnrnnrnnenananess 227 4 11 4 NetWork Access DOVER cas 237
32. Auto to have the Managed Switch automatically uses the port as IGMP Router port if the port receives IGMP query packets Static The Managed Switch always uses the specified port as an IGMP Router port Use this mode when you connect an IGMP multicast server or IP camera which applied with multicast protocol to the port None The Managed Switch will not use the specified port as an IGMP Router port The Managed Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port Use this mode when you connect other IGMP multicast servers directly on the non querier Managed Switch and don t want the multicast stream be flood to uplink switch throught the port that connected to the IGMP querier Enable the fast leave on the port Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration 160 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R IGMP Snoo
33. Auto refresh Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 5 5 LACP Port Statistics This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports The LACP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 5 7 appears LACP Statistics Port Received Transmitted Unknown tlegal 0 0 0 Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 5 7 LACP Statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port e LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port 104 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port Buttons Auto refresh i Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retesh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports 105 4 6 VLAN 4 6 1 VLAN Overview User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet alt
34. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds If your browser can not displies anythings in this page please download Adobe SVG tool and install it in your computer 4 2 11 System Log The switch system log information is provided here The System Log screen in Figure 4 2 14 appears System Log Information The total number of entries is 4 for the given level start from ID with 20 entries per page o tevel time messas Info 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 09 00 00 Switch just made a cold boot Info 1970 01 01 Thu O0 00 13 00 00 Link up on port 23 Figure 4 2 14 System Log page screenshot 64 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Level The level of the system log entry The following level types are supported Info Information level of the system log Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels e Clear Level To clear the system log entry level The following level types are supported Info Information level of the system log Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels e Time The time of the system log entry e Message The message of the system log entry Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Updates the system log entries
35. DNS DoS DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services By targeting at network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 961 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes E EEE EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE
36. MAC Statistics Description Show MAC address table statistics Syntax MAC Statistics lt port_list gt 366 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Set all of MAC statistics WGSW 24040 gt mac statistics Port Dynamic Addresses Total Dynamic Addresses 1 Total Static Addresses 6 MAC Flush Description Flush all learned entries Syntax MAC Flush 367 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 5 VLAN Configuration Command VLAN Configuration Description Show VLAN configuration Syntax VLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show VLAN status of port1 WGSW 24040 gt vlan configuration 1 VLAN Configuration Mode IEEE 802 1Q Port PVID IngrFilter FrameType LinkType Q in Q Mode Eth type Disabled All UnTag Disable VID VLAN Name VLAN forbidden table is empty VLAV PVID Description Set or show the port VLAN ID 368 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Syntax VLAN PVID lt port_list gt lt vid gt none Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt vid gt none Port VLAN ID 1 4095 or none default Show port VLAN ID Default Setting 1 Example Set PVID2 for port10 WGSW 24040 gt vlan pvid 10 2 VLAN Frame Type Descriptio
37. MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Auto refresh L Port Members Currently no entries present ort Members Delete mac address vian 10 a a a 4 5 6 7 e o ao ia i2 sa 14 15 6 s7 x9 19 0 oa 2a za z4 Currently no entries present The page includes the following fields Figure 4 6 17 MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot Object Delete MAC Address VLAN ID Port Members Adding a New MAC based VLAN Description To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted in the stack Indicates the MAC address Indicates the VLAN ID A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Click Add New Entry to add a new MAC based VLAN entry An empty row is added to the table and the MAC based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC based VLAN entry No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed Legal values for a 129 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The MAC based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on Save A MAC based VLAN without any port members will be deleted when you click Save The Delete button can be used to un
38. Preamble Destination Source VLAN TAG Ethernet Data FCS Address Address Type Dest Addr Src Addr E type Length E type New CRC 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46 1500 bytes 4 bytes The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Dest Addr Src Addr Length E type Old CRC Original Ethernet New Tagged Packet 108 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MM Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to
39. S500 LinkMTU is 1500 0 1 96_Scope Global Figure 5 3 Set IP address screen 4 Repeat Step 1 to check if the IP address is changed If the IP address is successfully configured the Managed Switch will apply the new IP address setting immediately You can access the Web interface of Managed Switch through the new IP address If you do not familiar with console command or the related parameter enter help anytime in console to get the help description You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 5 2 Telnet Login The Managed Switch also supports telnet for remote management The switch asks for user name and password for remote login when using telnet please use admin for username amp password 337 Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers H E HH A F rat 4 61 81181124 1 E AH 4 4 4 i si Si Ai Filli HH F Username admin Password Login in prog
40. SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm 10KM SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm 20KM SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1550nm 20KM SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm 40KM SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1550nm 40KM Fast Ethernet SFP Transceiver modules MFB FX MFB F20 MFB F60 MFB FA20 MFB FB20 SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 2KM SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 20KM SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 60KM SFP Port 100Base BX Transceiver WDM TX 1310nm 20KM SFP Port 100Base BX Transceiver WDM TX 1550nm 20KM 36 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 1 It recommends using PLANET SFP on the Managed Switch If you insert a SFP transceiver that is not supported the Managed Switch will not recognize it 2 Port 22 to Port 24 are shared SFP slot that support Gigabit amp Fast Ethernet SFP transceiver In the installation steps below this Manual use Gigabit SFP transceiver as the example However the steps for Fast Ethernet SFP transceiver are similar Make sure both side of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type for example 1000Base SX to 1000Base SX 1000Bas LX to 1000Base LX Check the fiber optic cable type match the SFP transceiver model gt Toconnect to 1000Base SX SFP transceiver use the Multi mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type gt Toconnect to 1000Base LX SFP transceiver use the Single mode fiber cable with one side must be male d
41. SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique security name is needed when traps and informs are enabled Buttons save Click to save changes _Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 4 SNMP System Information The switch system information is provided here The SNMP System Information screen in Figure 4 3 3 appears System Information Configuration System Name Wae W 24 040k System Location Figure 4 3 3 System Information Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 e System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is O to 255 e System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII chara
42. Show error statistics discards Show discard statistics filtered Show filtered statistics 0 7 Show priority statistics default Show all port statistics up Show ports which are up down Show ports which are down Port VeriPHY Description Run cable diagnostics Syntax Port VeriPHY lt port_list gt 361 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Port SFP Description Show SFP port information Syntax Port SFP lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show SFP information for port21 22 WGSW 24040 gt port sfp Port Type 1000Base LX 1000Base LX 1000 Base 1000 Base 1310 22 1310 Port Description Description Set or show Port Description Syntax Port Description lt port_list gt lt descr_text gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt descr_text gt Text of port description Default Setting empty 362 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 4 MAC Address Table Command MAC Configuration Description Show MAC address table configuration Syntax MAC Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show Mac address state WGSW 24040 gt mac configuration 1 MAC Configuration MAC Address 00 30 4f 24 04 d1 MAC Age Time 300 Port
43. Trap Community Trap Destination Address Trap Destination IPv6 Address Trap Authentication Failure Trap Link up and Link down Trap Inform Mode Trap Inform Timeout seconds Trap Inform Retry Times Trap Probe Security Engine ID Trap Security Engine ID User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SNMP v3 Set SNMP trap supported version 3 Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Indicates the SNMP trap destination address It allow a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y Z w And it also allow a valid hostname A valid hostname is a string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 dot dash Spaces are not allowed the first character must be an alpha character and the first and last characters must not be a dot or a dash Indicates the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can appear only once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Indicates the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failu
44. Unlimited Figure 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration screen page screenshot 4 4 4 lt The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode of IP Source Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All Guard Configuration configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled e Port Mode Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode Configuration and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port e Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients can be learned on given ports 278 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R This value can be 0 1 2 and unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port Buttons save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Translate Dynamic to Static Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries 4 12 11 IP Source Guard Static Table This page provides Static IP Source Guard Table The Static IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 12 11 appears static IP Source Guard Table Figure 4 12 11 Static IP Source Guard Table screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete
45. default All rate limiters lt rate gt Rate in pps 0 131071 Default Setting 1 Example Set rate limit value in 100 for port 1 WGSW 24040 gt security network acl rate 1 100 Security Network ACL Add Description Add or modify Access Control Entry ACE If the ACE ID parameter lt ace_id gt is specified and an entry with this ACE ID already exists the ACE will be modified Otherwise a new ACE will be added If the ACE ID is not specified the next available ACE ID will be used If the next ACE ID parameter lt ace_id_next gt is specified the ACE will be placed before this ACE in the list If the next ACE ID is not specified the ACE will be placed last in the list If the Switch keyword is used the rule applies to all ports If the Port keyword is used the rule applies to the specified port only If the Policy keyword is used the rule applies to all ports configured with the specified policy The default is that the rule applies to all ports Syntax Security Network ACL Add lt ace_id gt lt ace_id_next gt port lt port gt policy lt policy gt lt policy bitmask gt lt vid gt 430 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt tag_prio gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lt smac gt lt dmac gt arp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt smac gt lt arp_opcode gt lt arp_flags gt ip lt sip gt lt dip gt lt protocol gt lt ip_flags gt icmp lt sip gt
46. eseose Confirm password eseese User must change password at next logon M User cannot change password M Password never expires Account is disabled lt Back Cancel Figure 4 11 17 Add User Properties screen Set the Ports Authenticate Status to Force Authorized if the port is connected to the RADIUS server or the port is a uplink port that is connected to another switch Or once the 802 1X stat to work the switch might not be able to access the RADIUS server 260 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 11 10 802 1X Client Configuration Windows XP is originally 802 1X support As to other operating systems windows 98SE ME 2000 an 802 1X client utility is needed The following procedures show how to configure 802 1X Authentication in Windows XP Please note that if you want to change the 802 1x authentication type of a wireless client i e switch to EAP TLS from EAP MD5 you must remove the current existing wireless network from your preferred connection first and add it in again Configure Sample EAP MD5 Authentication 1 Goto Start gt Control Panel double click on Network Connections 2 Right click on the Local Network Connection 3 Click Properties to open up the Properties setting window JCOM 3C940 Status General Support Connection Statue Connected Duration 03 35 37 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Recelved 146 938 760 110 212 126 Figure 4 11 18
47. initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 11 2 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server Authentication Server Client l poa 802 1X Switch RADIUS EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request EAP Re
48. please refer to 4 6 10 1 examples The following steps will focus on the VLAN Trunk 126 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R port configuration 1 Specify Port 8 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port 2 Assign Port 8 to both VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 at the VLAN Member configuration page 3 Define a VLAN 1 as a Public Area that overlapping with both VLAN 2 members and VLAN 3 members 4 Assign the VLAN Trunk Port to be the member of each VLAN which wants to be aggregated At this sample add Port 8 to be VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 member port The screen in Figure 4 6 12 appears Port Members rt errs Delete viANIO vannamei ffs leek AOOO dil Be Be Be Bel Bel Bl nn rara AA QOOMMMoOMoO Figure 4 6 12 VLAN overlap port setting amp VLAN 1 The public area member assign 5 Specify Port 8 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port and the Trunking port must be a Tagged port while egress The Port 8 configuration as the following screen in Figure 4 6 13 a o 50210 Tag v Figure 4 6 13 The configuration of VLAN Trunk port That is although the VLAN 2 members Port 1 to Port 3 and VLAN 3 members Port 4 to Port 6 also belongs to VLAN 1 But with different PVID settings packets form VLAN 2 or VLAN 3 is not able to access to the other VLAN 6 Repeat Step 1 to 5 setup the VLAN Trunk port at the partner switch and add more VLANs to join the VLAN trunk repeat Step 1 to 3 to assign the Trunk port to the VLANs 4 6 10 3 Port Isola
49. range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP 196 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Class Classified QoS class DPL Classified Drop Precedence Level DSCP Classified DSCP value e Modification Buttons You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons Inserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE Moves the QCE up the list E Moves the QCE down the list Co Deletes the QCE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL 4 9 11 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration The QCE Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 14 appears QCE Configuration Port Members 31415 6 4718 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 24 22 23 24 Key Parameters Action Parameters o Tg Class oe Sani Default cal e an se a DMAC Type a col s Frame Frame Type Figure 4 9 14 QCE Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Members Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry By default all ports will be checked 197 e Key Parameters e Any e Etherne
50. save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 5 5 SNMPv3 Access Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page The entry index keys are Group Name Security Model and Security Level The SNMPv3 Access screen in Figure 4 3 8 appears SNMPv3 Access Configuration Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name E default ro group any No4uth MoPriy d default rw group any No4uth MoPriy Kiiev Eng Figure 4 3 8 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are 86 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy e Read View Name
51. 1 255 default Show UPnP TTL Default Setting 4 Example Set the value 10 for TTL value of the IP header in SSDP messages WGSW 24040 gt upnp ttl 10 UPnP Advertising Duration Description Set or show UPnP Advertising Duration Syntax UPnP Advertising Duration lt duration gt Parameters lt duration gt duration range 100 86400 default Show UPnP duration range Default Setting 100 Example Set value 1000 for UPnP Advertising Duration WGSW 24040 gt upnp advertising duration 1000 909 6 18 MVR Command MVR Configuration Description Show the MVR configuration Syntax MVR Configuration Example Show the MVR configuration WGSW 24040 gt mvr configuration MVR Configuration MVR Mode Disabled Muticast VLAN ID 100 Port Port Mode Port Type Immediate Leave Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled O O N O Oo Bb Q N Disabled Receive Disabled h O Disabled Receive Disabled MVR Mode Description Set or show the MVR mode Syntax 910 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MVR Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable MVR mode disable Disable MVR mode default Show MVR mode Default Setting disable Exampl
52. 1 2 34 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Renew Click to renew IPv6 AUTOCOMF This button is only available if IPv6 AUTOCONF is enabled 4 2 4 Users Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser After setup completed please press Save button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password the screen in Figure 4 2 4 appears Users Configuration Privilege Level admin 1S Figure 4 2 4 Users Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description 53 e User Name e Privilege Level Buttons User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The name identifying the user This is also a link to Add Edit User The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc ne
53. 1 4 Partner System ID Partner Port Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled LACP Statistics Description Show LACP Statistics Syntax LACP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters 470 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LACP statistics Example Show LACP statistics of port1 4 WGSW 24040 gt lacp statistics 1 4 Port RxFrames Tx Frames Rx Unknown Rx illegal LACP Timeout Description Set or show the LACP timeout Syntax LACP Timeout lt port_list gt fast slow Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports fast Fast PDU transmissions fast timeout slow Slow PDU transmissions slow timeout default Show LACP timeout Default Setting fast 471 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 11 LLDP Command LLDP Configuration Description Show LLDP configuration Syntax LLDP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LLDP configuration of port1 4 WGSW 24040 gt lldp configuration 1 4 LLDP Configuration Reinit Delay 2 Port Mode Port Descr System Name System Descr System Capa Mgmt Addr CDP awareness Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled LLDP Mode Description Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Set or show LLDP mode Syntax LLDP Mode lt p
54. 192 168 0 100 IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 3 3 Web management You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location just as if you were directly connected to the Managed Switch s console port Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 0 or later Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1 5 or later 42 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R _ _ _ _ _ _ a 4 B 5 1a 12 14 18 20 22 24 Y PLANET DN EE E EE U 3 5 F 3 11 13 15 WF 19 21 25 21 22 23 24 E 1 WGOSW 24040R System SNMP Port Management Link Aggregation k VLANs Spanning Tree Multicast GOS Access Control List WGSW 24040R 4Uthentication Security 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 SFP MAC Address Table LLDP Management Switch t Diagnostics Loop Protection PLANET Technology Corporation p SFLOW 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C RMON Tel 8B6 2 2219 9518 HELP Fax OG 2 Toes Email Support planet cam tw Welcome to PLANET Copyrighte201L2 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 3 4 Web main screen of Managed Switch 3 5 SNMP Based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch such as SNMPc Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What s Up Gold Th
55. 2 2 show the front panel of the Managed Switches WGSW 24040 Front Panel 24 Port Gigabit Managed Switch Figure 2 1 WGSW 24040 front panel 24 Port Gigabit Managed Switch Figure 2 2 WGSW 24040R front panel Mi Gigabit TP interface 10 100 1000Base T Copper RJ 45 Twist Pair Up to 100 meters Mi SFP slots 100 1000Base X mini GBIC slot SFP Small Factor Pluggable transceiver module From 550 meters Multi mode fiber up to 10 30 50 70 120 kilometers Single mode fiber Mi Reset button At the left of front panel the reset button is designed for reboot the Managed Switch without turn off and on the power The following is the summary table of Reset button functions 30 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Reset Button Pressed and Released Function lt 5 sec System reboot Reboot the Managed Switch Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration The Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings as below gt 5 sec Factory Default Default Username admin Default Password admin Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 Mi Console Port The console port is a DB9 RS 232 male serial port connector It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly Through the console port it provides rich diagnostic information includes IP Address setting factory reset port management link status and system setting Use
56. 2010 IEC 61000 4 4 2004 A1 2010 IEC 61000 4 5 2005 IEC 61000 4 6 2008 IEC 61000 4 8 2009 IEC 61000 4 11 2004 Responsible for marking this declaration if the Manufacturer C Authorized representative established within the EU Authorized representative established within the EU if applicable Company Name Planet Technology Corp Company Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Person responsible for making this declaration Name Surname Kent Kang Position Title Product Manager Taiwan 12 Dec 2011 End feng Place Date Legal Signature PLANET TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION e mail sales planet com tw http www planet com tw 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528
57. 24040 MAN Edge Switch E a A ee i n NY MAN Service Provider Domain VLAN 1 20 WGSW 24040 MAN Edge Switch A fe O ina 4 Amas tt j mm n Backbone Core Switch Er VLAN Tag Tag VLAN Tag F Y pad i VLAN Tag Tag VLAN 1 30 VLAN Tag WGSW 74040 E Customer B s LAN ee Customer B s LAN Headquater Q in Q VLAN Tunnel pay The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the
58. 36V to 60V DC Connect the power cable to the Managed Switch at the input terminal block The size of the two screws in the terminal block is M3 5 DC POWER ON in the OFF position CAUTION V Ensure the power switch DC 48V E Ye betore connect the DC wire a FG sE Figure 2 6 Rear Panel of WGSW 24040R Before connect the DC power cable to the input terminal block of WGSW 24040R ensure that the warning power switch in the OFF position and the DC power is OFF 2 2 Install the Switch This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections to the Managed Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps 2 2 1 Desktop Installation To install the Managed Switch on desktop or shelf please follows these steps Step1 Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Managed Switch Step2 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source as shown in Figure 2 7 33 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Figure 2 7 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop Step3 Keep enough ventilation space between the Managed Switch and the surrounding objects When choosing a location please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter 1 Section 4 and Specification Step4 Conn
59. 6 VLAN 3 The Per Port VLAN configuration in Figure 4 6 10 appears Ingress 4cceptable Set out layer Eilter a Frame Link Type Q in Q Mode YLA tag z Type ether type al ba be be fije fije N fee fe RRA ae G Foy fy Fy Sy FS Sy CS Sy Es E Es Es Es Es Es Es Es Es AA AS A A AS AS AA 1 2 J 4 5 E El o g Ll AS L Figure 4 6 10 Port 1 Port 6 VLAN Configuration 4 6 10 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware switch The most cases are used for Uplink to other switches VLANs are separated at different switches but they need to access with other switches within the same VLAN group The screen in Figure 4 6 11 appears 125 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R r si A h f 5 A PC 2 PC 3 i PC S PCS Untagged Tagged i i Untagged Tagged I a E i Cy Cy i E l l E a a i AA t d OD0DONnD i i 802 10 VLAN Trunking VLAN 2 VLAN 3 A l lt n i gt I aa PC 1 PC 4 Untagged i l Untagged ee A ee E T aE PESEE A Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group Set VLAN Group 1 Default VLAN with VID VLAN ID 1 Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 VLAN Group 2 with VID 2 VLAN Group 3 with VID 3 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 10 About the VLAN ports connect to the hosts
60. 802 3az EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU T 6 8031 Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame F AA 2 FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading It also provides directory service and security features IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands For example when you enter a URL in your browser this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web page The other main standard that controls how th
61. A115 NeiworeAccess SIALISIICS usd ld tea 238 4 11 6 Authentication Server COnNfiguUratiON coooonccccocccnnoconnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 245 ARAU o o ld e A 248 AAO RADIUS DES ad el tds dd e ei 249 4 11 9 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration ccccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeensaeees 256 4 11 10802 1X Client Configuration cee 261 EZ SO CU a O A A A A 264 412 POT LIME COMO A A A a yaaa aie Galeviaeseealeateeawetee 264 AZ 2 AACCESS WIGMAGSIMEIN ii A A a 268 4 12 3 ACCESS Management Statistics ut a lis 269 A e bac oeedene tetee ee tees 269 e ES y PEPE ec ac a neesaaaeeaeek 270 4126 Fon SOCUMY StAt S SA A A AAA Beles Ai 272 4 12 POM Security Del oe 274 AZ O 6 amen ene EE ea en ea on Re toe Tee ree OT ee ee Oe eee er ee 275 4129 DHCP SMOODING SLAUSUCS ri A esc ancien cen eases anda ake 276 4 12 1 0 IP Source Guard Configura On id A A A A dees 217 4121 1P Source Guard Statie Table e E E tudne tnd anenanst 279 AZ IZ AREAS DOC ION do ia 280 AAZAS ARE INSpection state Tal ici ad A AS 281 4 13 Addr ssS Veal A a E 282 4 13 1MAC Address Table CONQUE 282 4132 MAC Address Table Static Ao 284 Add DyNaMI CARP INSDECION Table cin 285 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table ooncccccoccccccoccnncnncnnononnnnnnncnnnnnncnnonnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnnrnrnnnrnnrnnaninns 286 ATELO Pr iri e a a a a a a a ueccooueanee
62. ACE are dropped Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are redirected to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port redirect operation is disabled Specify the mirror operation of this port Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame 208 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Modification Buttons You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons O Inserts a new ACE before the current row Edits the ACE row D Moves the ACE up the list D Moves the ACE down the list E Deletes the ACE E The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone Clear Click to clear the counters _ Remove All Click to remove all ACEs 4 10 3 ACE Configuration Configure an ACE
63. Figure 4 14 2 LLDPMED Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object Description e Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to 292 Coordinates Location Object e Latitude e Longitude e Altitude e Map Datum User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbour has been detected in order share LLDP M
64. H and is restricted to 5 32 octet string lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 md5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol The allowed length is 8 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 sha An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The allowed length is 8 40 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt auth_password gt A string identifying the authentication pass phrase des An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES privacy protocol privacy protocol should belong to The allowed string length is 8 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt priv_password gt A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 40 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Add SNMPv3 user entry 403 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp user add 800007e5017f000003 admin_snmpv3 md5 12345678 des abcdefgh Security Switch SNMP User Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 user entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 user entry
65. ID for each VCL entry VCL IP based VLAN Add Description Add or modify VCL IP Subnet based VLAN entry Syntax VCL IPVlan Add lt vce_id gt lt ip_addr_mask gt lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vce_id gt Unique VCE ID for each VCL entry lt ip_addr_mask gt Source IP address and mask Format a b c d n lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 946 VCL IP based VLAN Delete Description Delete VCL IP Subnet based VLAN entry Syntax VCL IPVlan Delete lt vce_id gt Parameters lt vce_id gt Unique VCE ID for each VCL entry 947 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 24 SMTP Command SMTP Configuration Description Show SMTP configure Syntax SMTP Configuration SMTP Mode Description Enable or disable SMTP configure Syntax SMTP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SMTP mode disable Disable SMTP mode default Show SMTP mode SMTP Server Description Set or show SMTP server configure Syntax SMTP Server lt server gt lt port gt Parameters lt server gt SMTP server address lt port gt SMTP server port 948 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SMTP Auth Description Enable or disable SMTP authentication configure Syntax SMTP Auth enable disable Parameters enable Enable SMTP authentication disable Disable SMTP authentication default Show
66. IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more complex features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across a internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over it is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial
67. IP address port Source and destination UDP TCP port enable Enable field in traffic distribution disable Disable field in traffic distribution Default Setting SMAC Enabled DMAC_ Disabled IP Enabled Port Enabled Example Disable SMAC mode 465 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt Aggr mode smac disable 466 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 10 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Command LACP Configuration Description Show LACP configuration Syntax LACP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LACP configuration WGSW 24040 gt lacp configuration Port Mode Key Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Disabled Auto Active bh O Disabled Auto Active LACP Mode Description Set or show LACP mode Syntax LACP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters 467 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LACP protocol disable Disable LACP protocol default Show LACP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable LACP for port1 4 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt lacp mode 1 4 enable LACP Key Description Set or s
68. MAC address and VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text no more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry 284 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry Buttons Auto refresh i Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Clear Flushes all dynamic entries k Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 13 3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table E
69. MD5 is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MDS is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Mirroring 965 MLD MVR NAS User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6 MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link much as IGMP is used in IPv4 The protocol is embedded in ICMPv 6 instead of using a separate protocol Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANSs The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it them Wikipedia NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source A client connects to
70. SIDE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown Figure A 1 Straight Through and Crossover Cable SIDE2 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE2 1 White Green 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Orange 7 White Brown 8 Brown Please make sure your connected cables are with same pin assignment and color as above picture before deploying the cables into your network 597 ACE ACL User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R APPENDEX B GLOSSARY ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The
71. SMTP authentication SMTP Auth_user Description Set or show SMTP authentication user name configure Syntax SMTP Auth_user lt auth_user_text gt Parameters lt auth_user_text gt SMTP authentication user name SMTP Auth_pass Description Set or show SMTP authentication password configure Syntax SMTP Auth_pass lt auth_pass_text gt Parameters lt auth_pass_text gt SMTP authentication password 949 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SMTP Mail From Description Set or show SMTP E mail from configure Syntax SMTP Mailfrom lt mailfrom_text gt Parameters lt mailfrom_text gt SMTP E mail from address SMTP Mail Subject Description Set or show SMTP E mail subject configure Syntax SMTP Mailsubject lt mailsubject_text gt Parameters lt mailsubject_text gt SMTP E mail subject SMTP Mail to 1 Description Set or show SMTP E mail 1 to configure Syntax SMTP Mailto1 lt mailto1_text gt Parameters lt mailto1_text gt SMTP E mail 1 to address SMTP Mail to 2 Description Set or show SMTP E mail 2 to configure 950 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Syntax SMTP Mailto2 lt mailto2_text gt Parameters lt mailto1_text gt SMTP E mail 2 to address 551 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 7 SWITCH OPERATION 7 1 Address Table The Switch is implemented
72. SNMPv3 accesses table on this page 4 3 2 SNMP System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page The SNMP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 1 appears SNMP ca pai Configuration pe e Read Community a cn Figure 4 3 1 SNMP System Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Mode e Version e Read Community e Write Community Description Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation Indicates the SNMP supported version Possible versions are SNMP v1 Set SNMP supported version 1 SNMP v2c Set SNMP supported version 2c SNMP v3 Set SNMP supported version 3 Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent 78 e Engine ID User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The allowed string length is O to
73. State e Port State e QoS Class e Port VLAN ID Port Counters Object e EAPOL Counters User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R NAS Statistics Port 1 Pect1 Auto refresh L Port State Figure 4 11 6 Network Access Statistics page screenshot Description The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Description These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states Force Authorized Force Unauthorized Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X 239 Direction Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Name Total Response ID Responses Start Logoff Invalid Type Invalid Length Total Request ID 240 IEEE Name dot1xAuthEapolFrames Rx dot1xAuthEapolRespld FramesRx dot1xAuthEapolResp
74. Subnet based VLAN The IP subnet based VLAN enties can be configured here This page allows for adding updating and deleting IP subnet based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries The IP based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 19 appears IP Subnet based VLAN Membership Configuration Auto refresh L Port Members AO e Delete VCE 10 i address Mask Lenon vian 10 1121355 8 9 gt 0 02 19h10 15 10 710 19 20 2 22 23 24 A Cuento entries present Currently no entries present Figure 4 6 19 Protocol to Group Mapping Table page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e VCE ID Indicates the index of the entry It is user configurable It s value ranges from 0 256 If a VCE ID is O application will auto generate the VCE ID for that entry Deletion and lookup of IP subnet based VLAN are based on VCE ID e IP Address Indicates the IP address e Mask Length Indicates the network mask length e VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet based VLAN entry To include a port in a IP subnet based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the IP subnet based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked B
75. TCP FIN e TCP SYN e TCP RST e TCP PSH e TCP ACK e TCP URG m Ethernet Type Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value When Range is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t c
76. The packets number that received packets with relay agent information option e Replace Agent Option The packets number that replaced received packets with relay agent information option e Keep Agent Optin The packets number that keepped received packets with relay agent information option e Drop Agent Option The packets number that dropped received packets with relay agent information option Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clear all statistics 4 2 10 CPU Load This page displays the CPU load using a SVG graph The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms 1sec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samles are graphed and the last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG The CPU Load screen in Figure 4 2 13 appears 63 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R CPU Load Auto refresh 100ms 3 1sec 1 10sec 1 all numbers running average 15 50 29 PP LJ NA Jl NV b gt Sy V ul WN NADA Figure 4 2 13 CPU Load page screenshot Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically
77. This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD SFM Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD SFM Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD SFM Information Table The MLDv2 Information screen in Figure 4 8 16 appears MLD SFM Information Auto refresh L Start from WLAN and Group with 20 entries per page VLAN 1D Groun Port Mode Source address Type Hardware Fiter Switch Mo more entries bo more entries Figure 4 8 16 MLD SSM Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed 173 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 e Type Indicates the Type lt can be either Allow or Deny e Hardware Filter Switch Indicates whether data plane destined to the specifi
78. User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Rising Index Rising event index e Falling Threshold Falling threshold value e Falling Index Falling event index Buttons Fetish Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds k Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 18 4 RMON Event Configuration Configure RMON Event table on this page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 18 4 appears RMON Event Configuraton Derete i Dese Type community Event Last Time Figure 4 18 4 RMON event configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Desc Indicates this event the string length is from 0 to 127 default is a null string e Type Indicates the notification of the event the possible types are none The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters log The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol snmptrap The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol logandtrap The numbe
79. VLAN ID and then by group Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table The MLD Groups Informatino screen in Figure 4 8 15 appears MLD Snooping Group Information Auto refresh Ll start from WLAN and group address with 20 entries per page Port Members AAA e vean 10 crows allefall epiese No more entries OO O No more entries Figure 4 8 15 MLD Snooping Groups Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group 172 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Auto refresh een Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately kx Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 8 13 MLDv2 Information Entries in the MLD SFM Information Table are shown on this page The MLD SFM Source Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information
80. WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Loop Protect Shutdown Description Set or show the Loop Protection shutdown time Syntax Loop Protect Shutdown lt shutdown time gt Parameters Shutdown time interval 0 604800 seconds A value of zero disables re enabling the port Default Setting 10 Loop Protect Port Configuration Description Show Loop Protection port configuration Syntax Loop Protect Port Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Loop Protect Port Mode Description Set or show the Loop Protection port mode Syntax Loop Protect Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Loop Protection disable Disable Loop Protection 924 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Loop Protect Port Action Description Set or show the Loop Protection port action Syntax Loop Protect Port Action lt port_list gt shutdown shut_log log Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports shutdown Shutdown the port shut_log Shutdown the port and Log event log Only Log the event 525 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 21 IPMC Command IPMC Configuration Description Show IPMC snooping configuration Syntax IPMC Configuration mId igmp Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for
81. WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP restricted role disable Disable MSTP restricted role Default disable Example Eisable STP restricted role on port WGSW 24040 gt stp port restrictedrole 1 enable STP Port RestrictedTcn Description Set or show the MSTP restrictedTcn port parameter Syntax STP Port RestrictedTcn lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP restricted TCN disable Disable MSTP restricted TCN Default disable Example Eisable STP restricted TCN on port1 WGSW 24040 gt stp port restrictedtcn 1 enable STP Port bpduGuard Description Set or show the bpduGuard port parameter 460 Syntax STP Port bpduGuard lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port BPDU Guard disable Disable port BPDU Guard Default disable Example Eisable BPDU guard on port1 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt stp port bpduguard 1 enable STP Port Statistic Description Show STP port statistics Syntax STP Port Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear the selected port statistics Example Show STP port statistics W
82. a non IP frame User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e QoS Class QoS Class value can be any of 0 7 e DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 9 DSCP Translation This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress The DSCP Translation screen in Figure 4 9 11 appears DSCP Translation lt All lt 4 T nal gn fun mo En E S44 4 4 4 4 a e ee fefe ama a lr o tu y A AA MA AAA 4 oN Ome whe Se Oo 4 4 hr Fon i hora borg m ha z a x JE t A s Lra 4 T 4 AEE 44 414 4 e 2 3 s s 4744 4 4 E d LI LI Pi LI d m a L al ne 4 ot lt Figure 4 9 11 DSCP Translation page screenshot 193 The page includes the following fields Object Buttons SAVE DSCP Ingress Translate Classify Egress Remap Click to save changes User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Description Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation Translate Classify DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of 0
83. across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Object e Delete e Policy ID e Application Type Description Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that shall be mapped to the specific ports Intended use of the application types Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application
84. address take effect immediately after click on the Save button you need to use the new IP address to access the Web interface For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup 4 Only accept command in lowercase letter under web interface 46 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 1 Main Web Page The SGSW Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it Main Functions Menu Copper Port Link Status SFP Port Link Status 14 16 18 i HPA AAA oooga ia A5 A Ag E mor L WGSW 24040R System SNMP t Port Management Link Aggregation t VLANs o Welcome to PLANET ro 4ccess Control List W G S W 2 4 O 4 0 R Authentication Security 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 SFP MAC Address Table LLDP Management Switch Diagnostics Loop Protection PLANET Technology Corporation gt eal 10F Wo 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C RMON Tel 886 2 2219 9518 MIS Fax o0b 2 2219 9520 Email Support planet com tw Copyrighte2012 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 4 1 4 Main Page Help Button Main Screen Panel Display The web agent displays an image of t
85. allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second 161 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields kx Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 4 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and IGMP throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more or a
86. and per port sFlow configuration Syntax sFlow Configuration sFlow Receiver Description Set or show the sFlow receiver timeout IP address and UDP port Syntax sFlow Receiver release lt timeout gt lt ip_addr_host gt lt udp_port gt lt datagram_size gt Parameters release Release the current owner of the receiver The owner can either be lt none gt if the receiver is not currently owned by anyone it can be lt Configured through local management gt if it s currently set up by CLI or Web or it can be anything else if is set up through SNMP You can only re configure the receiver if it is not currently owned by anyone or owned by CLI or Web If this argument is specified the remaining arguments are ignored lt timeout gt Receiver timeout measured in seconds The switch decrements the timeout once per second and as long as it is non zero the receiver receives samples Once the timeout reaches 0 the receiver and all its configuration is reset to defaults Valid range is 0 2147483647 seconds lt ip_addr_host gt IPv4 IPv6 address or a hostname identifying the receiver lt udp_port gt Receiver s UDP port Valid range is 0 65535 Use 0 to get default port which is 6343 lt datagram_size gt Maximum datagram size Valid range is 200 1468 bytes Default is 1400 bytes sFlow FlowSampler Description Set or show flow sampler configuration per port When operational the s
87. application type Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy e Tag Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 e VLAN ID VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 e L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 e DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified applicati
88. assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned QoS state Default Setting disable Example Enable NAS RADIUS QoS WGSW 24040 gt security network nas radius_qos enable Security Network NAS RADIUS _VLAN Description Set or show either global state use the global keyword or per port state of RADIUS assigned VLAN 425 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Syntax Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port RADIUS assigned VLAN setting default Show current per port RADIUS assigned VLAN state enable Enable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned VLAN state Default Setting disable Example Enable NAS RADIUS VLAN WGSW 24040 gt security network nas radius_vlan enable Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN Description Set or show either global state and parameters use the global keyword or per port state of Guest VLAN Unless the global keyword is used the lt reauth_max gt and lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt parameters will not be unused Syntax Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable lt vid gt lt reauth_max gt lt allow_if_eapol_see
89. based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below 243 Object e Identity e MAC Address e VLAN ID e State e Last Authentication Buttons User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Description Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As long as the backend server hasn t successfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for
90. broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward 140 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R A LAN 1 W Port cost 200 000 A 7 Bridge ID 15 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 B E C Bridge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 A LAN 2 _ gt A LAN 3 _ gt Figure 4 7 5 Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used A C Root Bridge Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port C ae Designated Bridge A LAN2 _ gt lt A LAN3 3 Figure 4 7 6 After Applying the STA Rules 141 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 20 000 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both s
91. by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance The Map Datum used for the coordinates given in this Option 293 Civic Address Location User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI Object e Country code e State e County e City e City district e Block Neighborhood e Street e Leading street direction e Trailing street suffix e Street suffix e House no e House no suffix e Landmark e Additiona
92. can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as beeing set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity lt can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also known as Root Guard If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the
93. changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state 4 11 2 Authentication Configuration This page allows you to configure how a user is authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces The Authentication Method Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 3 appears Authentication Method Configuration Method Fallback console telnet ssh Figure 4 11 3 Authentication Method Configuration page screenshot 226 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The page includes the following fields Object Description e Client The management client for which the configuration below applies e Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values None authentication is disabled and login is not possible local use the local user
94. currently unclaimed If configured through SNMP the release must be confirmed a confirmation request will appear The IP address or hostname of the sFlow receiver Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported The UDP port on which the sFlow receiver listens to sFlow datagrams If set to 0 zero the default port 6343 is used The number of seconds remaining before sampling stops and the current sFlow owner is released While active the current time left can be updated with a click on the Refresh button If locally managed the timeout can be changed on the fly without affecting any other settings The maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single sample datagram This should be set to a value that avoids fragmentation of the sFlow datagrams Valid range is 200 to 1468 bytes with default being 1400 bytes Description The port number for which the configuration below applies Enables disables flow sampling on this port The statistical sampling rate for packet sampling Set to N to sample on average 1 Nth of the packets transmitted received on the port Not all sampling rates are achievable If an unsupported sampling rate is 315 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R requested the switch will automatically adjust it to the closest achievable This will be reported back in this field e Flow Sampler Max The maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet to Header the sFlow datagram Valid
95. default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level 4 9 6 1 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for a specific port are configured on this page The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking sscreen in Figure 4 9 8 appears Port Qos Egress Port Tag Remarking Port 1 Figure 4 9 8 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Mode e PCP DEI Configuration DP level Configuration e QoS class DP level to PCP DEI Mapping Buttons Save Click to save changes Description Controls the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level Controls the default PCP and DEI values used when the mode is set to Default Controls the Drop Precedence level translation table when the mode is set to Mapped The purpose of this table is to reduce the 2 bit classified DP level to a 1 bit DP level used in the QoS class DP level to PCP DEI mapping process Controls the mapping of the classified QoS class DP level to PCP DEI values when the mode is set to Mapped Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 189 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Cancel Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page 4 9 7 Por
96. ee eo eee 456 STEMS TAU diraa ene cee ee oe eee ae eat ee ee ee en 456 SEP POR COMmMOUPAlO Messe E ene A eedln Seaeis San oad ecnleee eae 457 EFRON Mode iia 457 SI nse re wee unit were Mune ere tert err en ty eras 458 STE FOnMAWGE 6 gt meee re ern re ene eee ee id 458 STP POW PZ P dE 459 STP POM RESHICICCR OG unes 459 lia o A a A Seno ae ne ane ee 460 io E A ener er een ee 460 STP POSAS rn otto a 461 SEP PO Monasterio 461 SP MSTI Font Contigua ON eri pic 462 SA O ner nets ne Sea Sea ote dade ns Scan cts Psa atin RER 462 STE MS TIPO PROTA A A AA AAA AA AA ect Rad 463 6 9 Link Aggregation Command dod 464 AQGregalion COMINO ie ee 464 PAG ONS GAO A O 464 Aggregaton Delete i dy tat ene Aran sb cal a II A EEAS 464 ATEN bo 0 46 o papers tetas arnt Rarer a omen TIED Senne ier ater one Tne rere ne ener ree ee enero a 465 Aggregation Moden cia ca Manual easel saa ar aa a baled east la 465 6 10 Link Aggregation Control Protocol COMMANdO cccooonccnnnncnoncnonononancconcnnnnnnannnrrrnnnnnanannnrnrrrnnnnaaannnrerrnnnas 467 BAC Py CON guata si 467 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R LACP MOG Cis west an ca a o ns aa ado dao O o O 467 AA a ee ee 468 Ba A co eee en mee Mer er nee 468 PAC PSV SIS PON ste de ii lt o aida terio Saba 469 PA PROMS secs a al ol eR lh a eh a le lt toe Sue See 469 WAG SIA WS iaa lll ls 470 LANG SAU SCS surta pie o e aa 470 BPA TOON ratita tlf daba 471 BAT BEDP CONNOR 472 BILD PG OMMOUNAT ON vice stewe
97. forward delay 4 30 and max_age lt forward_delay 1 2 Default Setting 15 Example 452 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Set STP forward delay value in 25 WGSW 24040 gt stp fwddelay 25 STP CName Description Set or Show MSTP configuration name and revision Syntax STP CName lt config name gt lt integer gt Parameters lt config name gt MSTP Configuration name A text string up to 32 characters long Use quotes to embed spaces in name lt integer gt Integer value Default Setting Configuration name MAC address Configuration rev O Example Set MSTP configuration name and revision WGSW 24040 gt stp cname 9f WGSW 24040 1 STP BPDU Filter Description Set or show edge port BPDU Filtering Syntax STP bpduFilter enable disable Parameters enable disable enable or disable BPDU Filtering for Edge ports Default Setting Disable 453 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Set edge port BPDU filtering WGSW 24040 gt stp bpdufilter enable STP BPDU Guard Description Set or show edge port BPDU Guard Syntax STP bpduGuard enable disable Parameters enable disable enable or disable BPDU Guard for Edge ports Default Setting Disable Example Set edge port BPDU guard WGSW 24040 gt stp bpduguard enable STP Recovery Description Set or show edge port error recovery timeout Syntax STP recovery
98. full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not effect this setting 146 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well e Point to point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transitions to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 65 535 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Table 4 7 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 999 999 Tru
99. group entry Auth Priv Auth Priv MD5 DES The entry index key are lt security_model gt and lt security_name gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Add lt security_model gt lt security_name gt lt group_name gt Parameters lt security model gt v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM lt security_name gt A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 405 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt group_name gt A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Add SNMPv3 group entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp group add usm admin_snmpv3 group_snmpv3 Security Switch SNMP Group Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 group entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 group entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp group delete 1 Security Switch SNMP Group Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 group entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 group entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch snm
100. gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port IP source guard static entry delete Delete existing port IP source guard static entry lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt allowed_ip gt Pv4 address a b c d IP address allowed for doing IP source guard lt ip_mask gt IPv4 mask a b c d IP mask for allowed IP address Example Add IP source guard static entry WGSW 24040 gt security network ip source guard entry 1 add 1 192 168 0 20 441 Security Network IP Source Guard Status Description Show IP source guard static and dynamic entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show IP source guard static and dynamic entries User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security network ip source guard status Security Network IP Source Guard Translation Description Translate IP source guard dynamic entries into static entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Translation Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration Description Show ARP inspection configuration Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration Example Show ARP inspection configuration WGSW 24040 gt security network arp inspection configuration 442 Security Network ARP Inspection Mode Description Set or show ARP inspection mode Syntax Security Netwo
101. hash mode settings are global whereas the aggregation group relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Hash Code Contributors The Static Aggeration screen in Figure 4 5 2 appears Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCPVUDP Pon Number Figure 4 5 2 Aggregation Mode Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Source MAC Address e Destination MAC Address e IP Address e TCP UDP Port Number Description The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Static Aggregation Group Configuration The Aggregation Group Configuration screen i
102. installation of computer components User Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame 973 VLAN ID User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Virtual LAN A method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Provider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs Voice VLAN WEP WiFi WPA Voice VLAN is VLAN configured spe
103. is located after the ingress queues SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail 570 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch SPROUT also ca
104. is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value The remapped DSCP value is always taken from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DPO table Remap DP Aware DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is Click to save changes remarked with remapped DSCP value Depending on the DP level of the frame the remapped DSCP value is either taken from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DPO table or from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DP 1 table Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 8 DSCP Based QoS This page allows you to configure the basic QOS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches The DSCP Based QoS screen in Figure 4 9 10 appears 191 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification DSCP Trust Qos Class DPL A 16 AAA A A A A A AA a ojl gt A Oo ol ol ol oa 4 5 1 4 41 14 S o e ol ollel oll lall AA A AA AA A A S 4 k feeb m efe e fol e fe k 4 Sa Figure 4 9 10 DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DSCP Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 64 e Trust Controls whether a specific DSCP value is trusted Only frames with trusted DSCP values are mapped to a specific QoS class and Drop Precedence Level Frames with untrusted DSCP values are treated as
105. is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy bitmask The allowed range is 0x0 to Oxff Select the frame type for this ACE These frame types are mutually exclusive Any Any frame can match this ACE Ethernet Type Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE The IEEE 802 3 describes the value of Length Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal equal to 0600 hexadecimal ARP Only ARP frames can match this ACE Notice the ARP frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type 210 e Action e Rate Limiter e Port Redirect e Mirror e Logging e Shutdown e Counter a MAC Parameters Object e SMAC Filter e SMAC Value e DMAC Filter User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R IPv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv4 frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type IPv6 Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv6 frames won t match the ACE with ehternet type Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 16 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates tha
106. learnt to be a router port Switch port number Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 8 6 IGMP Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this page The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table The IGMP Groups Informatino screen in Figure 4 8 9 appears 164 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R IGMP Snooping Group Information Auto refresh L start from WLAN and group address with 20 entries per page Port Members Mo more entres rt embers viano rows alalle pepese No more entries O OOOO OO Figure 4 8 9 IGMP Snooping Groups Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Auto refresh a Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from t
107. lt log_id gt System log ID or range default All entries all Show all levels default info Show informations warning Show warnings error Showerrors Example To show system log WGSW 24040 gt system log lookup Number of entries Level Time Message Info 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 02 00 00 Switch just made a cold boot 2 Info 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 06 00 00 Link up on port 23 WGSW 24040 gt System Log Clear Description Clear the system log 345 Syntax System Log Clear all info warning error Parameters all Show all levels default info Show informations warning Show warnings error Show errors Example To sclear the system log WGSW 24040 gt system log clear WGSW 24040 gt User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R System Reboot Description Reboot the system Syntax System Reboot Example To reboot device without changing any of the settings WGSW 24040 gt system reboot System Restore Default Description Restore factory default configuration Syntax System Restore Default keep_ip Parameters keep_ip Keep IP configuration default Restore full configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example To restore default value but not reset IP address WGSW 24040 gt system restore default keep_ip System Load Description Show current CPU load 100ms 1s and 10s running average in percent zero is idle
108. lt timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt Time before error disabled ports are reenabled 30 86400 seconds 0 disables default Show recovery timeout Default Setting Disable 454 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Set STP recovery value in 30 sec WGSW 24040 gt stp recovery 30 STP Status Description Show STP Bridge status Syntax STP Status lt msti gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show STP Bridge status WGSW 24040 gt stp status CIST Bridge STP Status Bridge ID 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 Root ID 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 Root Port 1 Root PathCost 0 Regional Root 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 Int PathCost 0 20 Steady Pri PathCost Edge P2P Uptime DesignatedPort Forwarding 128 20000 Yes Yes 0d 00 10 32 STP MSTI Priority Description Set or show the bridge instance priority 455 Syntax STP Msti Priority lt msti gt lt priority gt Parameters lt msti gt lt priority gt Default 32768 Example Set MST1 priority value in 4096 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 STP bridge priority 0 4096 8192 12288 53248 57344 61440 WGSW 24040 gt stp msti priority 1 4096 STP MSTI Map Description Show or clear MSTP MSTI VLAN mapping con
109. make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged MM Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged
110. many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second Description Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and 143 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot e Port Error Recovery The time that has to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be Timeout enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours The Gigabit Ethernet Switch implement the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning tree protocol While select Compatibles mode the system use the RSTP 802 1w to compatible and co work with another STP 802 1d s BPDU control packets Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 3 Bridge Status This page provides a
111. network according to its importance to that particular business type e QoS Profile consists of multiple sets of rules classifier plus service level combinations The QoS profile is assigned to a port s e Rules comprises a service level and a classifier to define how the Switch will treat certain types of traffic Rules are associated with a QoS Profile see above To implement QoS on your network you need to carry out the following actions 1 Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic 2 Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch 3 Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier 4 Apply a QoS profile to a port s 181 4 9 2 Port Policing User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R This page allows you to configure the Policer settings for all switch ports The Port Policing screen in Figure 4 9 1 appears QoS Ingress Port Policers L ae eee es lt bik iki bk fk bh m kh x ea ra x ea Je ff feje fe e lt Aa Ea MOO OOOO d d d d d d d d a 4 Figure 4 9 1 QoS Ingress Port Policers page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Port Enable Rate Unit Flow Control Description The port number for which the configuration below applies Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port
112. of module_ id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number 60 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agent s MAC address The DHCP Relay Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 11 appears DHCP Relay an Relay Mode Relay Server 0000 oo Relay Information Mode Mode Relay Information Policy Information Policy Figure 4 2 11 DHCP Relay Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Relay Mode e Relay Server e Relay Information Mode e Relay Information Policy Description Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security considered Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay inform
113. of a protection group as defined in G 8031 Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device Auto negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link 999 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R C CC is an acronym for Continuity Check It is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to it s peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality CDP is an acron
114. or any default Show all VLANs Example Show VLAN 1 IPMC Versions WGSW 24040 gt ipmc version igmp 1 IPMC SFM Description Show SFM including SSM related information for IPMC Syntax IPMC SFM mldligmp lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports IPMC Parameter RV Description Set or show the IPMC Robustness Variable Syntax IPMC Parameter RV mldligmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_ rv Parameters mid igmp 935 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_rv 1 Default Value 2 1 255 Robustness Variable default Show IPMC Interface Robustness Variable IPMC Parameter QI Description Set or show the IPMC Query Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter QI mld igmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_ qi Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs lpmc_param_di 1 Default Value 125 1 31744 Query Interval in seconds default Show IPMC Interface Query Interval IPMC Parameter QRI Description Set or show the IPMC Query Response Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter QRI mld igmp l
115. or exclude the port from the Private VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New Private Click Add New Private VLAN to add a new private VLAN ID An empty row is VLAN added to the table and the private VLAN can be configured as needed The allowed range for a private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range Any values outside this range are not accepted and a warning message appears Click OK to discard the incorrect entry or click Cancel to return to the editing and make a correction The Private VLAN is enabled when you click Save The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new Private VLANs _ Adel new Private VLAN Click to add new VLAN U O Save Click to save changes A El Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 6 9 Port Isolation Overview When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented Two application examples are provided in this section e Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN e Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zon
116. policy Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and 296 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this
117. privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account WO O 5 0 Save Click to save changes i El Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values f Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the Users Delete User Delete the current user This button is not available for new configurations Add new user Once the new user is added the new user entry shown in the Users Configuration page Users Configuration Username Privilige Level admin 15 quest 5 Lo o Tet AN Add nEw user Figure 4 2 6 User Configuration page screenshot After change the default password if you forget the password Please press the Reset button in the front panel of the Managed Switch over 10 seconds and then release the current setting includes VLAN will be lost and the Managed Switch will restore to the default mode 4 2 5 Privilege Levels This page provides an overview of the privilege levels After setup completed please press Save button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password the screen in Figure 4 2 7 appears User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Privilege Level Configuration Privilege Levels Group Name Configuration Configuration Execute Status Statistics Status Statistics Read only Read write Re
118. range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the IGMP join report is dropped IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new IGMP join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 7 appears IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Figure 4 8 7 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings 162 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Filtering Group The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered e Add New Filtering Click Add New Filtering Group to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Group Specify the Port and Filtering Group of the new entry Click Save Buttons Add new F
119. reffered as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to 116 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID If a port is included in a VLAN an image will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list an image will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user register VLAN on same Forbidden port then conflict port will be displayed as conflict port e VLAN Membership The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users are selected it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users and this is by default VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwar
120. refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clear all statistics 4 12 4 HTTPS Configure HTTPS on this page The HTTPS Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 4 appears HTTPS Configuration Figure 4 12 4 HTTPS Configuration screen page screenshot 269 The page includes the following fields Object e Mode e Automatic Redirect Buttons Save Click to save changes User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Description Indicates the HTTPS mode operation When the current connection is HTTPS to apply HTTPS disabled mode operation will automatically redirect web browser to an HTTP connection Possible modes are a Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation a Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation It only significant if HTTPS mode Enabled is selected Automatically redirects web browser to an HTTPS connection when both HTTPS mode and Automatic Redirect are enabled or redirects web browser to an HTTP connection when both are disabled Possible modes are a Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation a Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 5 SSH Configure SSH on this page This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules
121. s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of MAC Based Authentication Unlike 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx xx xx xx Xx that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only
122. the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration To reset the Managed Switch to the Factory default setting you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device be rebooted You can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx IPLA NET wasw 24040 Networking 4 Communication Console e 9 gt 115200 8 1 1000 10 100 CT 3 4 b 0 O 390 e Rese PA A Hardware Reset button 19 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 2 21 System Reboot The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location Once the Reboot button is pressed user have to re login the WEB interface about 60 seconds later the System Reboot screen in Figure 4 2 28 appears System Reboot Are you sure you want to perform a System Reboot Figure 4 2 28 System Reboot page screenshot Buttons Yes Click to reboot the system No Click to return to the Port State page without reboot the system You can also check the SYS LED at the front panel to identify the System is load completely or not If the SYS LED is blinking then it is in the firmware load stage if the SYS LED light on you can use the WEB browser to login the Switch 76 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol 4 3 1 SNMP Overview The Simpl
123. the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e IP Address Allowed Source IP address e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address Buttons Add New Enty Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 279 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 12 12 ARP Inspection ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration The ARP Inspection Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 12 appears ARP Inspection Configuration mode pais Y Translate Dinamic to Static Port Mode Configuration Dima Disabled bled bl O o ee ee Elle le le MEAN ES AAA y a a 4 Figure 4 12 12 ARP Inspection Configuration screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode of ARP Inspection Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Configuration e Port Mode Configuration Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Globa
124. type unicast multicast broadcast any Ethernet Type keyword Ethernet Type 0x600 OxFFFF or any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 and 0x86DD IPv6 LLC keyword Destination Service Access Point 0x00 OxFF or any Source Service Access Point 0x00 OxFF or any LLC control 0x00 0xFF or any SNAP keyword Protocol ID EtherType or any Pv4 keyowrd IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or any Source IP address a b c d n or any DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 or any specific or range 900 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt fragment gt IPv4 frame fragmented yes nolany lt sport gt Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or any specific or port range lt dport gt Dest TCP UDP port 0 65535 or any specific or port range ipv6 IPv6 keyowrd lt sip_v6 gt IPv6 source address a b c d n or any 32 LS bits lt class gt QoS Class class 0 7 default basic classification lt dp gt DP Level dp 0 3 default basic classification lt classified_dscp gt DSCP dscp 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 QoS QCL Delete Description Delete QCE entry from QoS Control list Syntax QoS QCL Delete lt qce_id gt Parameters lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 256 default Next available ID QoS QCL Lookup Description Lookup QoS Control List Syntax QoS QCL Lookup lt qce_id gt Parameters lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 2
125. unknown or un support protocol OutOctets The number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters OutUcastPkts The number of uni cast packets that request to transmit OutNUcastPkts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets that request to transmit OutDiscards The number of outbound packets that are discarded event the packets is normal OutErrors The The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors OutQLen The length of the output packet queue in packets The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are Absolute Get the sample directly Delta Calculate the difference between samples default The value of the statistic during the last sampling period The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are Rising Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold Falling Trigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold RisingOrFalling Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less than the falling threshold default Rising threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 Rising event index 1 65535 Falling threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 Falling event index 1 65535 320 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 W
126. you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Mi Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets 4 6 3 VLAN Basic Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the Managed Switch The VLAN Basic Information screen in Figure 4 6 1 appears VLAN Basic Information YLAN Basic Information Mode IEEE 802 10 Maximum VLAN ID 4044 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 Current Number of VLANs 1 VLAN Learning PRL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Figure 4 6 1 VLAN Basic Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Display the current VLAN mode used by this Managed Switch E Port Based E IEEE 802 1Q VLAN e Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this Managed Switch e Maximum Number of Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this Managed Switch Supported VLANs 110 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Current number of Display the current number of VLANs VLANs e VLAN Learning Display the VLAN learning mode The Managed Switch supports IVL IVL
127. your system to e Control a wide variety of network traffic by e Classifying traffic based on packet attributes e Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications e Applying security policy through traffic filtering e Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter e Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows e Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network e Manage network congestion QoS Terminology e Classifier classifies the traffic on the network Traffic classifications are determined by protocol application source destination and so on You can create and modify classifications The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to schedule them with the appropriate service level e DiffServ Code Point DSCP is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are encoded by certain applications and or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network e Service Level defines the priority that will be given to a set of classified traffic You can create and modify service levels e Policy comprises a set of rules that are applied to a network so that a network meets the needs of the business That is traffic can be prioritized across a
128. 0 gt security network dhcp relay information policy keep Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics Description Show or clear DHCP relay statistics Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics clear Parameters clear Clear DHCP relay statistics Example Show DHCP relay statistics WGSW 24040 gt security network dhcp relay statistics Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration Description Show DHCP snooping configuration Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode Description Set or show the DHCP snooping mode Syntax 437 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP snooping mode When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports disable Disable DHCP snooping mode default Show flow DHCP snooping mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DHCP snooping mode WGSW 24040 gt security network dhcp snooping mode enable Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode Description Set or show the DHCP snooping port mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode lt port_list gt trusted untrusted Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP messag
129. 00Base TX or 10Base T the Cable Diagnostics cause the link to drop while the diagnostics are running After the diagnostics are finished the link is reestablished And the following functions are available Coupling between cable pairs m Cable pair termination Cable Length 4 15 1 Ping This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 1 appears 305 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R ICMP Ping IP Address 00 00 Ping Interval Figure 4 15 1 ICMP Ping page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes e Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times e Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch or you had setup the correct gateway IP address Buttons Start Click to transmit ICMP packets New Ping click to re start diagnostics with PING 4 15 2 IPv6 Ping T
130. 040 gt lldp optional_tlv 1 port_descr disable LLDP Interval Description Set or show LLDP Tx interval Syntax LLDP Interval lt interval gt Parameters lt interval gt LLDP transmission interval 5 32768 Default Setting 30 Example Set transmission interval in 10 WGSW 24040 gt lldp interval 10 LLDP Hold Description Set or show LLDP Tx hold value Syntax LLDP Hold lt hold gt Parameters lt hold gt LLDP hold value 2 10 Default Setting 3 474 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Set LLDP hold value in 10 WGSW 24040 gt lldp hold 10 LLDP Delay Description Set or show LLDP Tx delay Syntax LLDP Delay lt delay gt Parameters lt delay gt LLDP transmission delay 1 8192 Default Setting 2 Example Set LLDP delay value in 1 WGSW 24040 gt lldp delay 1 LLDP Reinit Description Set or show LLDP reinit delay Syntax LLDP Reinit lt reinit gt Parameters lt reinit gt LLDP reinit delay 1 10 Default Setting 2 475 Example User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Set LLDP reinit delay value in 3 WGSW 24040 gt lIdp reinit 3 LLDP Statistics Description Show LLDP Statistics Syntax LLDP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Example Show LLDP Statistics of port 1 Clear LLDP statisti
131. 1 Default Setting 0 Example Set the default EDI in 1 WGSW 24040 gt qos Port TagRemarking EDI 1 10 1 QoS Port TagRemarking Map Description Set or show the port tag remarking map This map is used when port tag remarking mode is set to mapped and the purpose is to translate the classified QoS class 0 7 and DP level 0 1 to PCP and DEI Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking Map lt port_list gt lt class_list gt lt dpl_list gt lt pcp gt lt dei gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class_list gt QoS class list or all default All QoS classes 0 7 lt dpl_list gt DP level list or all default All DP levels 0 1 lt pcp gt Priority Code Point 0 7 lt dei gt Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 QoS Port DSCP Translation Description Set or show DSCP ingress translation mode If translation is enabled for a port incoming frame DSCP value is translated and translated value is used for QoS classification Syntax QoS Port DSCP Translation lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters 493 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable DSCP ingress translation disable Disable DSCP ingress translation default Show DSCP ingress translation mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DSCP ingress translation on all port WGSW 24040 gt qos Port DSCP T
132. 24040R Parameters all Show all switch configuration default Show system configuration port Show switch port configuration lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example To display system information WGSW 24040 gt System configuration System Contact System Name WGSW 24040 System Location Timezone Offset 0 MAC Address 00 30 4f 11 22 33 System Time 1970 01 01 Thu 00 24 39 00 00 System Uptime 00 24 39 Software Version Beta1205281742 Software Date 2012 05 28T17 42 57 0800 Previous Restart Cold WGSW 24040 gt System Log Configuration Description Show system log configuration Syntax System Log Configuration Example To display system log information WGSW 24040 gt System log configuration System Log Configuration System Log Server Mode Disabled 340 System Log Server Address Info System Log Level WGSW 24040 gt User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R System Version Description Show system version information Syntax System Version Example To display system version WGSW 24040 gt System version Version Beta1205281742 Build Date 2012 05 281T17 42 57 0800 WGSW 24040 gt System Log Server Mode Description Show or set the system log server mode Syntax System Log Server Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable system log server mode disable Disable system log s
133. 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users 4 3 3 SNMP Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this page The SNMP Trap Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 2 appears SNMP Trap Configuration Trap Community Trap Destination Address a Trap Authentication Failure Trap Link and Link dowe Trap Inform Mode 20 Trap Inform Timeout seconds ee Trap Inform Rety Times OOOO Figure 4 3 2 SNMP Trap Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Trap Mode e Trap Version Description Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap mode operation Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c 79
134. 3 appears 195 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Qos Control List Configuration OCE Port Frame Type SMAC DMAC PCP cee por Frame Type sac omac vio pce oer Tepe DSCP Figure 4 9 13 QoS Control List Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e QCE e Port e Frame Type e SMAC e DMAC e VID e PCP e DEI e Action Description Indicates the index of QCE Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address i e first three octet byte of MAC address Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame Possible values are Any All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed Unicast Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed Multicast Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed Broadcast Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowedd The default value is Any Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs VID can be in the range 1 4095 or Any Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or
135. 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad IP DNS Description Set or show the DNS server address 350 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Syntax IP DNS lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Showdne IP address Default Setting 0 0 0 0 Example Set DNS IP address WGSW 24040 gt ip dns 168 95 1 1 IP DNS Proxy Description Set or show the IP DNS Proxy mode Syntax IP DNS_ Proxy enable disable Parameters enable Enable DNS Proxy disable Disable DNS Proxy Default Setting disable Example Enable DNS proxy function WGSW 24040 gt ip dns_proxy enable IPv6 AUTOCINFIG Description Set or show the IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode 351 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Syntax IP IPv6 AUTOCONFIG enable disable Parameters enable Enable IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode disable Disable IP gt v6 AUTOCONFIG mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IPv6 autoconfig function wesw 24040 gt ip ipv6 autoconfig enable IPv6 Setup Description Set or show the IPv6 setup Syntax IP IPv6 Setup lt ipv6_addr gt lt ipv6_prefix gt lt ipv6_router gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4d
136. 56 default Next available ID QoS QCL Status Description Show QCL status This can be used to display if there is any conflict in QCE for differnet user types Syntax 901 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R QoS QCL status combined static voice_vian conflicts Parameters combined static voice_vian conflicts combined Shows the combined status static Shows the static user configured status voice_vlan Shows the status by Voice VLAN conflicts Shows all conflict status default Shows the combined status QoS QCL Refresh Description Resolve QCE conflict status Same H W resource is shared by multiple applications and it may not be available even before MAX QCE entry So user can release the resource in use by other applications and use this command to acquire the resource Syntax QoS QCL refresh 902 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 14 Mirror Command Mirror Configuration Description Show mirror configuration Syntax Mirror Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show mirror configuration WGSW 24040 gt mirror configuration Mirror Port Description Set or show the mirror port Syntax Mirror Port lt port gt disable Parameters lt port gt disable Mirror port or disable default Show port Default Setting disable Example Set port 2 for the mirror port W
137. 6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once lt also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 92 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Prefix Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 through 128 e Router Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Provide the IPv6 SNTP Server address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192
138. 63 DSCP values Click to enable Classification at Ingress side There is following configurable parameter for Egress side Remap Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 10 DSCP Classification This page allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value The DSCP Classification screen in Figure 4 9 12 appears 194 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R DSCP Classification QoS Class DPL DSCP OS lt lt O O OF Oe Ol O O Oo 0 0 1 1 E 2 3 3 fil fil 5 5 z z pi f Figure 4 9 12 DSCP Classification page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Class Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7 QoS Class 0 7 can be mapped to followed parameters e DSCP Select DSCP value 0 63 from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 11 QoS Control List This page shows the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row describes a QCE that is defined The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list The QoS Control List screen in Figure 4 9 1
139. 87 e Port Shaper Unit Buttons Save User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 13200 when the Unit is Mbps Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Cancel Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page 4 9 6 Port Tag Remarking This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports The Port Tag Remarking screen in Figure 4 9 7 appears Qos Egress Port Tag Remarking Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified m JOT E Oo Pa Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified PA jb J Pt p1 Li le ro eS leo las Figure 4 9 7 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port Description The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 6 1 188 e Mode User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Shows the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use
140. 9 VOCS VLAN GU Delete carino abs 520 VOCE YLAN CULO aci E 520 VOICE VEAN OUFLOOKUD asana E o 520 VOICE MEAN POTOSI AA AAA AAA A A AAA a a 521 VOICE VLAN SCCUNY etian a aE a sasduesnsaenauee 521 Voice VLAN Discovery Protool indi nec 522 6 20 LOOD Protect COMMANA iraani an a aaran a 523 LOODProteCtCOnNnNguUra NON eenas dle a ea i e a Ea 523 LOOP Protect INO A A E a I EE A A E es 523 LOOP Frotect Trans Mita E a a edo aed soe a ESS 523 LOOF caro so a eee ete ere ee e N T 524 Loop Protect Port Configuration oooccccooncnccoocnncnnncnnnnoncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnonnrrn nn nnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrrnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnanos 524 17 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R LOOP Protect Pon Mode a a a a bt o o A tae tee 524 LOOP I rolect POM ACHON ae 525 G21 IPMG COMMA ssip a a aa eaae aa aa 526 PME CORAGUr ON E a A E E antes hetadiene 526 PNC NOTO roots 526 PUES ounie ne ra a EE r a dae Spates E A aA 527 IPMO Leave PTOX ai li lis eat 527 O mat sagan ee beamanae eeu aeebar mace aenisciee bs ndeec ued euacaideeneaadeens 528 I SIN Neca Secs ah ah acca ected eda deeded ce eh saad cei ecb dec teser che te cet aeicion che eda iad auettialetaieh sd eeanidaee 528 PMC VEAN Add ti a mre ne ee ta 529 EMEVLAN Delete a ess E ce dee ca 529 PMG SUAS nia di taa 530 FEN A LS 530 PMG Compatibili yssir ii diia 531 IPMO Fasie Vinil A A A AA AA E meer 531 PMC TATON ui a albs 532 IPM CERON oen a e Rea es a a a a a a 533 PMC ROMs in 533 AM
141. 96 IPv6 Router Act ive Gont igurak ion for IPv6 Static with Stateless IPv6 Addre fe80 2 230 4f ff fe55 6644 64 Scope Link Status UP RUNNING Enabled MTU 1500 LinkMTU is 1500 IPv6 Ad 2 168 0 100 96 Scope Global Status UP7RUNNING Enabled MTU 1500 LinkMTU is 1500 WNGSH 24040R gt M Figure 5 2 Show IP information screen a Configure IP address 3 On WGSW 24040 gt prompt enter the following command and press lt Enter gt As show in Figure 5 3 WGSW 24040 gt ip setup 192 168 0 101 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 253 1 The previous command would apply the follow settings for the Switch IP 192 168 0 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 0 253 VLAN ID 1 336 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Lvl COM1 115200baud Tera Term YI File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help o I ih tear Poel ed cel pia oc 11 31 SI 71 9liil 113115117119121123 1 1211 122 1231 1241 a be a a te ta a teat ooo oo oo o 4 od 4 o admin in progr Login HESH 24040R Pipe conf igurat ion IP Configuration P Client Address Mas R Saiar S Server N ID 1 S Proxy Disabled v AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled v6 Link Local Address f e80 230 4f f f f e55 6644 Pv6 Address 192 168 0 100 IPv6 Pref ix 56 IPv6 Router Active Conf iguration for IPy IPv6 Address fe80 2 Seq O lt OHAHHO TU gaiki Static with Stateless e55 6644 64 Scope Link
142. AC address to authenticate against the backend server Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses which makes MAC based authentication less secure than 802 1X authentication The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Network Access Server Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 4 appears 227 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Network Access Server Configuration System Configuration Reauthentication Enabled Reauthentication Period seconds EAPOL Timeout seconds Aging Period seconds Guest VLAN ID Max Reauth Count Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen Port Configuration i m Globally Disabled Fore Authorized Globally Disabled ka y Force Authorized Y Globally Disabled ll y Force Auth Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Ga Figure 4 11 4 Network Access Server Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields System Configuration Object Description e Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled 228 e Reauthentication Enabled e Reauthentication Period e EAPOL Timeout e Aging Period e Hold Time User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R all ports are allowed forwa
143. ARP request lt allowed_ip gt IPv4 address a b c d IP address allowed for doing ARP request Example Add ARP inspection static entry Security Network ARP Inspection Status Description Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entries Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entries WGSW 24040 gt security network arp inspection status 444 Security Network ARP Inspection Translation Description Translate ARP inspection dynamic entries into static entries Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Translation Security AAA Configuration Description Show Auth configuration Syntax Security AAA Configuration Example Show Auth configuration WGSW 24040 gt security aaa configuration AAA Configuration Server Timeout 15 seconds Server Dead Time 300 seconds RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration Mode IP Address Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration 445 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Mode IP Address Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled TACACS Authentication Server Configuration Mode IP Address Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Security AAA Timeout Description Set or show server timeout Syntax Secu
144. Access Control Entry on this page An ACE consists of several parameters These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select First select the ingress port for the ACE and then select the frame type Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type selected A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here The ACE Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 3 appears 209 Ingress Port Ingress Port naa Filter Frame Frame Type User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R ACE Configuration Action Logging Shutdown VLAN Parameters 802 10 Aiea Tagget ay VLAN ID Filter ID Filter O E Figure 4 10 3 ACE Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Ingress Port Policy Filter e Policy Value e Policy Bitmask e Frame Type Description Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any port Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port Specify the policy number filter for this ACE Any No policy filter is specified policy filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE choose this value Two field for entering an policy value and bitmask appears When Specific is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy value The allowed range is 0 to 255 When Specific
145. Authorized Globally Disabled Security Network NAS Reauthentication Description Set or show Reauthentication state Syntax Security Network NAS Reauthentication enable disable Parameters enable Enable reauthentication 422 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R disable Disable reauthentication default Show current reauthentication mode Default Setting disable Example Enable reauthentication function WGSW 24040 gt security network nas reauthentication enable Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod Description Set or show the period between reauthentication attempts Syntax Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod lt reauth_period gt Parameters lt reauth_period gt Period between reauthentication attempts 1 3600 seconds default Show current reauthentication period Default Setting 3600 Example To show the period between reauthentication attempts WGSW 24040 gt security network nas reauthperiod Security Network NAS EapolTimeout Description Set or show the time between EAPOL retransmissions Syntax Security Network NAS EapolTimeout lt eapol_ timeout gt 423 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters lt eapol_timeout gt Time between EAPOL retransmissions 1 65535 seconds default Show current EAPOL retransmission timeout Default Setting 30 Example Set the time between EAPOL retransmissions for 100sec WGSW 24040 g
146. CMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 3 appears 307 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Remote IP Ping Test ee Figure 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings e Remote IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes e Result Display the ping result 4 15 4 Cable Diagnostics This page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 308 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic Therefore running cable diagnastic on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics screen in Figure 4 15 4 appears VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Peal Cable Status Pair A 1 2 Length A Pair B 3 6 Length B Pair C 4 5 Length Pair D 7 8 Length D Figure 4 15 4 Ve
147. Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 68 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 2 15 Web Firmware Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 18 appears Firmware Upgrade ne 6 Figure 4 2 18 Web Firmware Upgrade page screenshot To open Firmware Upgrade screen perform the folling 1 Click System gt Web Firmware Upgrade 2 The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4 2 18 Browse 3 Click the button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware Upload 4 Select on the firmware then click Unload the Software Upload Progress would show the file upload status 5 Once the software be loaded to the system successfully The following screen appears The system will load the new software after reboot Firmware Upgrade in progess The uploaded firmware Image is being transferred to flash The system will reboot after the Upgrade Until then do not reset or power off the device Y Completed Figure 4 2 19 Software successfully loaded notice screen DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch until the update progress is complete Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without press the OK button after the image be loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade process
148. DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and remote it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP relay agent information option mode disable Disable DHCP relay agent information option mode default Show DHCP relay agent information option mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DHCP relay agent information option mode WGSW 24040 gt security network dhcp relay information mode enable Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy Description Set or show the DHCP relay mode When enable DHCP relay information mode operation if agent receive a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy replace keep drop Parameters replace Replace the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it keep Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it drop Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains relay information default Show DHCP relay information policy 436 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Default Setting replace Example Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it WGSW 2404
149. DP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server e State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values E Disabled The server is disabled a Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running a Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 11 8 RADIUS Details This page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server The RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 9 appears 249 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server 1 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Access Accepts Access Requests Access Rejects Access Retransmissions Access Challenges Pending Requests Malformed Access Responses Timeouts Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dr
150. ED information as fast as possible to new neighbours Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbours it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of the neighbours receiving the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated The recommended value is 4 times given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when an LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including Network Connectivity Devices or other types of links Description Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits Itis possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined
151. ES tad A o 533 A 534 A RR 534 A A PE O A A A A 535 RMS Paramete RV ar a E o a a etna stadia 535 IPMG Parameter Olei a a A 536 PME Parameter OR eisa a a a a ciehianleduica Sadie aarddantaicat sav eu aitiddeas alae 536 IPMC Parameter LEQ amaeana a a adi 537 IPM Parameter URI irnar E EE aca 537 6 22 SFIOW COM sss aa et Siac ees 539 SFIOW Contiguration dt a a a cones eect a aaliae 539 A e eS a eat obptnaced cb eactna ve nenvan dea epentioeneh aataininaereeeees 539 SFIOW FIOWS ampet a one a aaa a dico 539 SIO WC OUMOTF OMG uocis a a a e tua 540 SFIOW Statistics RECEIVE nonesa a A a ev dee tarts 540 SFW SlatisSticS Sample Sesera E a 541 6 23 VLAN Control List Command suorien oeae aasa aeaa aa anai eaaa aina 542 VCL MAC based VLAN Configuration ccoconcccccoccnconoconcnnnnnnononnnonnncnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnrrnnarinnnns 542 VOL MACDased VLAN AO asis A AAA A AE 542 VGLIMAC Dased VEAN Dele ua A AA RA A AAA 542 VEL SUS US aia oi badt 543 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R VGL Protocolebased VLAN Add Ethernet icono e o o as o ee so cda e a et 543 V CLProtocolzbased VLAN Add SNA a 543 VCL Protocol based VEAN AGG UG dd lo db e do dd A 544 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete Ethernet ll oococococccccccccccccncncncncncncnononcncncncn cnc ncncncn cara rn cara rnrnrnrnrnnnnnann 544 VEL Protocolibased VLAIN Delete SNAPE e o A 544 VEL Protocol based VEAN Delete LLE A ok 545 VC Protocoleba
152. F lt SWS SHS S ESIE AICA AA a E O O O es m e ee file fe lt Figure 4 4 1 Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e Port Description Indicates the per port description e Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down 88 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port e Configured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode Auto Setup Auto negotiation for copper interface 10Mbps HDX Force sets 10Mbps Half Duplex mode 10Mbps FDX Force sets 10Mbps Full Duplex mode 100Mbps HDX Force sets 100Mbps Half Duplex mode 100Mbps FDX Force sets 100Mbps Full Duplex mode 1Gbps FDX Force sets 10000Mbps Full Duplex mode a Disable Shutdown the port manually e Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation
153. Fr amesRx dot1xAuthEapolStartFra mesRx dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFr amesRx dot1 xAuthInvalidEapolF ramesRx dot1xAuthEapLengthErr orFramesRx dot1xAuthEapolFrames Tx dot1xAuthEapolReqldFr amesTx Description The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by the switch The number of valid EAPOL Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch The number of valid EAPOL response frames other than Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by the switch The number of valid EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by the switch The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by the switch in which the frame type is not recognized The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by the switch in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by the switch The number of EAPOL Request Identity frames that e Backend Server Counters User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Tx Requests mesTx dot1xAuthEapolRegqFra have been transmitted by the switch The number of valid EAPOL Request frames other than Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative states
154. GSW 24040 gt mirror port 2 903 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Mirror Mode Description Set or show the mirror mode Syntax Mirror Mode lt port_cpu_list gt enable disable rx tx Parameters lt port_cpu_list gt Port list or CPU or all default All ports and CPU enable Enable Rx and Tx mirroring disable Disable Mirroring rx Enable Rx mirroring tx Enable Tx mirroring default Show mirror mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the mirror mode for port 1 4 WGSW 24040 gt mirror mode 1 4 enable 904 6 15 Configuration Command Configuration Save Description Save configuration to TFTP server Syntax Config Save lt ip_server gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_name gt Configuration file name Configuration Load Description Load configuration from TFTP server Syntax Config Load lt ip_server gt lt file_name gt check Parameters lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_name gt Configuration file name User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R check Check configuration file only default Check and apply file 905 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 16 Firmware Command Firmware Load Description Load new firmware from TFTP server Syntax Firmware Load lt ip_addr_string gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ip_addr_strin
155. GSW 24040 gt stp port statistics Port Rx MSTP TxMSTP RxRSTP Tx TCN Rxlll Rx Unk TxRSTP RxSTP TxSTP STP Port Mcheck Description Set the STP mCheck Migration Check variable for ports 461 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Syntax STP Port Mcheck lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Set the STP mCheck Migration Check variable for port 1 WGSW 24040 gt stp port mcheck 1 STP MSTI Port Configuration Description Show the STP port instance configuration Syntax STP Msti Port Configuration lt msti gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default auto STP MSTI Port Cost Description Set or show the STP port instance path cost Syntax STP Msti Port Cost lt msti gt lt port_list gt lt path_cost gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt path_cost gt STP port path cost 1 200000000 or auto Default 462 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R auto Example Set MSTI7 in port WGSW 24040 gt stp msti port cost 7 1 Port Path Cost STP MSTI Port Priority Description Set or show the STP port instance priority Syntax STP Msti Port Pr
156. GSW 24040R 6 6 Private VLAN Configuration Command PVLAN Configuration Description Show Private VLAN configuration Syntax PVLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show private VLAN configuration WGSW 24040 gt pvlan configuration Private VLAN Configuration Port Isolation Disabled PVLAN ID Ports PVLAN Add Description Add or modify Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Add lt pvlan_id gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range 3 8 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Add port1 to port4 in PVLAN10 WGSW 24040 gt pvlan add 10 1 4 PVLAN Delete Description Delete Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Delete lt pvlan_id gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range Example Delete PVLAN10 WGSW 24040 gt pvlan delete 10 PVLAN Lookup Description Lookup Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Lookup lt pvlan_id gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID default Show all PVLANs The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range Example Lookup PVLAN WGSW 24040
157. GSW 24040R Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry SIVE Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 18 2 RMON Alarm Detail This page provides an Detail of a specific RMON statistics entry screen in Figure 4 18 2 appears Detailed RMON Alarm ID Auto refresh d Interval undefined Variable Sample Type Value Startup Rising Threshold Risinglndex Falling Threshold Fallingindex OS CO Ml Ce Oo Figure 4 18 2 Detailed RMON Alarm ID page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Interval Variable Sample Type Value Startup Alarm Rising Threshold Rising Index Falling Threshold Falling Index Description Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold Indicates the particular variable to be sampled The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds The value of the statistic during the last sampling period The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid Rising threshold value Rising event index Falling threshold value Falling event index 321 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds kx
158. GSW 24040R GOS THOU POMC Unit ci an e o cd o o o ei oleae 488 Q0S PorPollcorElow CoOntrold ani aa 488 QOS POr Scheduler ModE a dl o do dd 489 QOS POr Scheduler WelONt 2 ada ii id ii it 489 OOS Por Queueshaper Mode ci 490 OOS TOM OOH SH apenas tai con dolo aca cia N 490 QOS POM OUGUESRADEK EXCESO a Ea a 491 QoS Port TagRemarking MOdeC cccccceeeccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeesaeeseeesseeeseeessaeeeeeessaaees 491 QOS POM TagrRemarkind POP un e o NN e a a aD aa 492 QOS Pon TagRemnarking DE ae 492 QOS PON TagremarnangM asisto a a illo 493 OOS Port DSC Pi MiramSlallOn tetitas i dba atera 493 QOS Por DSCP Classical a soak eet eg aah aati tech aie ail Dic 494 QoS Porn DSGP EgressRe marica a dsd dd es 495 GS Penes aio 495 90S DSCP Translations ta dic 496 QOS DSCP MUS a a a a a a da e ao a 496 90S DSCP Classification Mode wissen awd wae eae en 496 OSD SCP Classification MAP a ts ice tl ela todo dls celos ld bd LLO 497 MASAS O lo pa 17 010 AO A N oePA lt lt pPP ooo Shand k octane a a chee esau a 497 COS POR SOM UNICA a o a e LO 498 QOS PON Storm MUIGAS anans A A e ica 498 QOS POSO DO adC Sus id rlea 499 AE A em eee eer ee ee 500 OS OCI Delete e a as ila a e th acct Ch ANIA ne ha lt 501 OSC Cle OOK UD sires aora aaa ua 501 a me em RE CaN eC ee Eee Sener oe 501 QOS OC le REMSS I nyiuman A 502 614A Miror Command tariis ii 503 Miror CG oniguratio Nears A a E a A A 503 NICO PO G
159. ID e System Name e Port Description e System Capabilities e Management Address Description The port on which the LLDP frame was received The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other Repeater Bridge WLAN Access Point 2 3 4 5 Router 6 Telephone 7 DOCSIS cable device 8 Station only 9 Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by Management Address is the neighbor unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist the discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbor s IP address Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 302 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 14 6 Port Statistics This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole stack switch while local counters refers to counters for the currently selected switch The LLDP Statistics
160. IPv4 IGMP IPMC Mode Description Set or show the IPMC snooping mode Syntax IPMC Mode mld igmp enable disable Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC snooping disable Disable IPMC snooping default Show global IPMC snooping mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP snooping User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt ipmc mode igmp enable 926 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R IPMC Flooding Description Set or show the IPMC unregistered addresses flooding operation Syntax IPMC Flooding mld igmp enable disable Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC flooding disable Disable IPMC flooding default Show global IPMC flooding mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP flooding WGSW 24040 gt ipmc flooding igmp enable IPMC Leave Proxy Description Set or show the mode of IPMC Leave Proxy Syntax IPMC Leave Proxy mld igmp enable disable Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC Leave Proxy disable Disable IPMC Leave Proxy default Show global IPMC Leave Proxy mode 927 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP Leave Proxy WGSW 24040 gt ipmc leave proxy igmp enable IPMC Proxy Description
161. ITU T Y 1731 used to implement carrier ethernet functionality MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on this A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame OUI is the organizationally unique identifier An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address P PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as User Priority PD is an acronym for Powered Device In a PoE gt system the power is delivered from a PSE power sourcing equipment to a remote device The remote device is called a PD PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implement the Ethernet physical layer IEEE 802 3 567 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the I
162. IUCN ii ci ct etc le ante A lethal ed eet aa eaaa 155 AO AIS MIPS SOO DING ea iris 155 4 8 2 15 MP Sno00pMg COntgura lO A ese ee ete 158 4 9 3 IGMP Snooping Y LAN Config ratiON sesepi en E a a a E a aa a 160 4 8 4 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering coooccncoocccnccocnnnnnoncncnoncnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnonnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnronnrnnnnnannns 162 AS SM SNOOPINO OASIS AS ARS AA A A A E AAA 163 A566 IGMP Group nto rma lOs A IA ad ae Red eee 164 AS IGMP VS IO MON a a a 165 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 38 MLD Snooping COnngquration 28 fee da a a o a ae ae 166 4 6 9 MLD Snooping VLAN Contiguration canen a A a a a 168 46 10 MED Snooping Port Group lO rira a a a N 170 4 621 MED SNOOPING STA lUS sisine e a aa a EARTE 171 40 12 MED Group niormat onean a EN 172 BOS MLD VZ INO Mmao arta T siuind en encunteatomaataneutnes saawelus ncsuatssieaatece aawarns 173 A re Oo E eat ys td pea o ees 174 AS I OMVR SI S tai aia in eee ree 177 A S TO MYR Groups IMormalon ua e a e a do e eee a ah ei a O oe ae da O 178 ESA MVR SEM NOMA UOM A A Rate 179 AD QUAIL GF SONICO aaa 181 491 Understand O Suns E A 181 A OE ONICO ira nio 182 AO FOME laSS MC MOM A AA a e ae 183 ATA POR SCM CCN ia AAA AAA AAA nde ever aleaies 184 AO POR SiNADIING a lios 185 4 9 5 1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers ccoooccccccnccncccnccncnoncnnonononononcnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnncnnnnnrrnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnos 186 AO Ol Tag Remake o A A SS 188
163. If the QoS class has been dynamically changed then the actual QoS class is shown in parentheses after the configured QoS class Syntax QoS Port Classification Class lt port_list gt lt class gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt QoS class 0 7 Default Setting 0 Example Set default QoS class in 1 for port 1 WGSW 24040 gt qos Port Classification Class 1 1 QoS Port Classification DPL Description Set or show the default Drop Precedence Level User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Syntax QoS Port Classification DPL lt port_list gt lt dpl gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dpl gt Drop Precedence Level 0 3 Default Setting 0 Example Set the default Drop Precedence Level in 1 for port1 WGSW 24040 gt qos Port Classification dpl 1 1 QoS Port Classification Tag Description Set or show if the classification is based on the PCP and DEI values in tagged frames Syntax QoS Port Classification Tag lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable tag classification disable Disable tag classification default Show tag classification mode Default Setting disable Example Enable QoS port classification Tag WGSW 24040 gt qos Port Classification tag 1 10 enable 485 User s Manual of WG
164. L Timeout 30 Age Period Hold Time 10 RADIUS QoS Disabled RADIUS VLAN Disabled Guest VLAN Disabled Guest VLAN ID 1 Max Reauth Count 2 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Frame Seen Disabled Port Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID Force Authorized Globally Disabled Security Network NAS Mode Description Set or show the global NAS state Syntax Security Network NAS Mode enable disable Parameters enable Globally enable 802 1X disable Globally disable 802 1X default Show current 802 1X global enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable IEEE802 1X function WGSW 24040 gt security network nas mode enable 421 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Network NAS State Description Set or show the port security state Syntax Security Network NAS State lt port_list gt auto authorized unauthorized single multi macbased Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Port based 802 1X Authentication authorized Port access is allowed unauthorized Port access is not allowed single Single Host 802 1X Authentication multi Multiple Host 802 1X Authentication macbased Switch authenticates on behalf of the client default Show 802 1X state Default Setting none Example Show the port 1 security state WGSW 24040 gt security network nas state 1 Port Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID Force
165. LAN information Enable VLAN group Configures the VLAN membership Display VLAN membership status Display VLAN port status Creates removes primary or community VLANs Enable disable port isolation on port Configures the MAC based VLAN entries Displaies MAC based VLAN entries Configures the IP based VLAN entries Configures the protocol based VLAN entries Displaies the protocol based VLAN entries 106 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Membership 4 6 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by re
166. LAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally 107 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header MM 802 1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority VLAN ID VID 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TCI Tag Control Information 2 bytes 2 bytes
167. Learning MAC Add Description Add MAC address table entry Syntax MAC Add lt mac_addr gt lt port_list gt lt vid gt Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX X s a hexadecimal digit lt port_list gt Port list or all or none lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 363 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Add Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 in port1 and vid1 WGSW 24040 gt mac add 00 30 4f 01 01 02 1 1 MAC Delete Description Delete MAC address entry Syntax MAC Delete lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address xx xx XX XX XX XX Or XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX X iS a hexadecimal digit lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Delete Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 in vid 1 WGSW 24040 gt mac delete 00 30 4f 01 01 02 1 MAC Lookup Description Lookup MAC address entry Syntax MAC Lookup lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX X IS a hexadecimal digit lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Lookup state of Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 WGSW 24040 gt mac lookup 00 30 4f 01 01 02 364 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MAC Age Time Description Set or show the
168. M CO E O A O Daaa aaa g a DS CO eS CO Ml E Gl eS eS CO A St CO eS A m E GA Figure 4 9 18 Queuing Counters page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Q0 Q7 There are 8 QoS queues per port QO is the lowest priority queue e Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 9 1 Voice VLAN Configuration The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI The Voice VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 19 appears 202 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Volce VLAN Configuration Port Configuration mode Security Discovery Protocol JET ET ET JE e z Deol v a tt es Y Sav hw ou 1 Soins tov ot x Saints bom vo ou z paaa s aas at ou O Figure 4 9 19 Voice VLAN Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the Voice
169. M HPSoOOd ROM HPLI1320 Other Places Ei Desktop ad Entire Metwork e My Computer My Documents CJ CJ A y Printers and Faxes fae on 10 1 1 26 FAE on planet m FAE Files on 10 1 1 26 FileMKT_Public on File enm on 10 1 1 20 enm on File EMM Public on 10 1 1 20 EMM Public on File Details Figure 4 2 10 UPnP devices shows on Windows My Network Places 4 2 8 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP Relay on this page DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter
170. M Port DB9 RS 232 or USB to RS 232 converter E Ethernet Port connect e Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors a Above Workstation installed with WEB Browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug in It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Managed Switch 39 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 3 2 Management Access Overview The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods a An administration console a Web browser interface a An external SNMP based network management application The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Method Advantages Disadvantages Console e No IP address or subnet needed e Must be near switch or use dial up connection e Text based e Not convenient for remote users e Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal e Modem connection may prove to be unreliable built into Windows or slow 95 98 NT 2000 ME XP operating systems e Secure Web Browser e Ideal for configuring the switch remotely e Security can be compromised hackers need e Compatible with all popular browsers only know the IP address and subnet mask e Can be accessed from any location e May encounter lag times on poor connec
171. MAC address age timer Syntax MAC Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 0 10 1000000 O disable default Show age time Default Setting 300 Example Set agetime value in 30 WGSW 24040 gt mac agetime 30 MAC Learning Description Set or show the port learn mode Syntax MAC Learning lt port_list gt auto disable secure Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Automatic learning disable Disable learning secure Secure learning default Show learn mode Default Setting Auto Example Set secure learning mode in port 365 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt mac learning 1 secure MAC Dump Description Show sorted list of MAC address entries Syntax MAC Dump lt mac_max gt lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_max gt Maximum number of MAC addresses 1 8192 default Show all addresses lt mac_addr gt First MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX X is a hexadecimal digit default MAC address zero lt vid gt First VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Show all of MAC table WGSW 24040 gt mac dump Type VID MAC Address 00 30 4f 11 22 33 None CPU 33 33 00 00 00 01 1 28 CPU 33 33 00 00 00 02 1 28 CPU 33 33 ff 11 22 33 1 28 CPU 33 33 ff a8 00 64 1 28 CPU 40 61 86 04 18 69 23 ff ff ff ff ff ff 1 28 CPU
172. MP Trap Destination Description Set or Show the SNMP trap destination address Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Example Set SNMP trap destination address for 192 168 0 20 WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp trap destination 192 168 0 20 396 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination Description Set or Show the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination lt ipv6_addr gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Example Set SNMP trap IPv6 destination address for 2001 0001 WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp trap ipv6 destination 2001 0001 Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure Description Set or show the SNMP authentication failure trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure enable disa
173. Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Set 2048 frame size for port1 WGSW 24040 gt port maxframe 1 2048 Port Power Description Set or show the port PHY power mode Syntax Port Power lt port_list gt enable disable actiphy dynamic Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable all power control disable Disable all power control actiphy Enable ActiPHY power control dynamic Enable Dynamic power control Default Setting disable Example Disable port power function for port1 4 WGSW 24040 gt port power 1 4 enable Port Excessive Description Set or show the port excessive collision mode Syntax Port Excessive lt port_list gt discard restart Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports discard Discard frame after 16 collisions restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions 360 default Show mode Default Setting Discard Example User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt port excessive 1 restart Port Statistics Description Show port statistics Syntax Port Statistics lt port_list gt lt command gt up down Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt command gt The command parameter takes the following values clear Clear port statistics packets Show packet statistics bytes Show byte statistics errors
174. Mapping Table page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Delete e Group Name e VLAN ID e Port Members e Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Buttons Save Click to save changes Description To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save A valid Group Name is a string of atmost 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 no special character is allowed Whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be preused by any other existing mapping entry on this page Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Click Add New Entry to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table the Group Name VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new entry 134 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to pr
175. N table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 12 appears MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration start fram WLAN with 20 entries per page LAN ID Snooping Enabled MLD Querier Compatibility R QI sec QRI 0 1 sec LLOI 0 1 sec URI sec The page includes the following fields Figure 4 8 12 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page screenshot Object Description 168 e VLANID e MLD Snooping Enable e MLD Querier e Compatibility e QRI e LLQI e URI Buttons Retresh User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The VLAN ID of the entry Enable the per VLAN MLD Snooping Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected Enable the MLD Querier in the VLAN Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is MLD Auto Forced MLDv1 Forced MLDv2 default compatibility value is MLD Auto Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a link The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robust
176. P Snooping Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 12 9 appears DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Port 1 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Rx Discover Tx Discover Rx Offer Tx Offer Rx Request Tx Request Rx Decline Tx Decline Rx ACK Tx ACK Tx NAK Tx Release Tx Inform Tx Lease Query Tx Lease Unassigned Tx Lease Unknown Tx Lease Active Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Port Statistics screen page screenshot Rx NAK Rx Release Rx Inform Rx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active D O A CO A O A O A O AA O SOS OS COS COS O eS A The page includes the following fields Object Description e Rx and Tx Discover The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted 2 6 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Rxand Tx Offer The number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted e Rxand Tx Request The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and transmitted e Rxand Tx Decline The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted e Rxand Tx ACK The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted e Rxand Tx NAK The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted e Rxand Tx Release The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Inform The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and t
177. PC 6 will received the packet through Port 5 and Port 6 2 While the packet leaves Port 5 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 6 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 3 en At this example VLAN Group 1 just set as default VLAN but only focus on VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic flow Note Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group Set VLAN Group 1 Default VLAN with VID VLAN ID 1 Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 VLAN Group 2 with VID 2 VLAN Group 3 with VID 3 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 10 3 Remove VLAN Member for VLAN 1 Remember to remove the Port 1 Port 6 from VLAN 1 membership since the Port 1 Port 6 had be assigned to VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 Port Members AT re COCO 0000001 o aaa Figure 4 6 9 Add new VLAN group assign VLAN members for VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 and remove specify ports from VLAN 1 member It s import to remove the VLAN members from VLAN 1 configuration Or the ports would become overlap setting About the overlapped VLAN configuration see next VLAN configure sample 124 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 Assign PVID for each port Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 PVID 2 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 PVID 3 Port 7 Port 10 PVID 1 5 Enable VLAN Tag for specific ports Link Type Port 3 VLAN 2 and Port
178. R A eee eC eer eee 350 IPON SO rpc hace ae cect se cic ipod ana 351 PVG AUTOS IN IG rran E A Shee E EN 351 A ce ote aeieae aa gotene nag teeta cee ase acacueen gates tcmeeec seal btee tines oomeresatentaneon tees 352 IPVO PIN A o O E 353 PANTEON IquratoN oi ia 354 PNTPMOde ii o ta it eee eee eee eee 354 PONTE Sener AdO eaaa a in 355 IPN TIP Sewer PVG AG er r O EO 355 P NTPSServer Dele ii AAA AAA A 356 6 3 Port Management Command cccccccsssenssseeeeeeeeecennnseeeeeeeconesseeeeeeeeeoonassseeeseeeoconassseeeneeoonsssseesseesoes 357 ls A EA 357 ROTOS a ae 397 POTRO WOW cil 358 SA A A EE A 359 AAN A a ld on neat 359 OME OW aii dci 360 ROH EXCOSSIVO ra 360 OVE SUAS UGS coccion illo iia e Ra tencsetae eas 361 Port STI Ye costo ater eel o e po Le ANIA cab o ee A Se tl Soh o daa AA a oe ee 361 A ce cea 362 FOR DSS CHIDO M stees sen toads bere tase st ic gehen hate Scenes ide hen ad seen ata Aad Sate Seen Palette Saeed ele 362 6 4 MAC Address Table Command unicidad 363 WAG C ONMOUPAUO Msi a iaa 363 VAC Addeen n EAT cooasi 363 MAC Della RA AAA it Ai iia 364 IT SO OGG ooo oia eel a 364 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MACG AgS TM a ol a e el ol na ee eee eee 365 MAG Learning A ee te eee ee tees 365 A sw ausdibaiiaa petit e acetone betes Sp hada acta ceo crs uta eves 366 MAS o A O 366 MARA o do e e ae NS 367 6 5 VELAN Contiguration Command rssi a eaaa aa A hats ieee easiness 368 MEAN CG ATIQ UIE ALO Pi asics S
179. Rx Multicast Rx Broadcast Rx Pause Rx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Tx Packets Tx Octets Tx Unicast Tx Multicast Tx Broadcast Tx Pause Tx 64 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes 2066 1531131 2050 Tx Drops Tx Late Exc Coll Rx Drops Rx CRCO Alignment Rx Undersize Rx Oversize Rx Fragments Rx Jabber Rx Filtered Figure 4 4 3 Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 page screenshot The page includes the following fields Receive Total and Transmit Total Object Description e Rxand Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets e Rxand Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets 91 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Rxand Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets e Rxand Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on
180. SK WPA PSK is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access Pre Shared Key WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 111 standard Wikipedia WPA Radius WPS WRES WTR WPA Radius is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access Radius 802 1X authentication server WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 11i standard Wikipedia WPS is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Setup It is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless home network The goal of the WPS protocol is to simplify the process of connecting any home device to the wireless network W
181. SNMP Community Add lt community gt lt ip_addr gt lt ip_mask gt Parameters lt community gt Community string lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address lt ip_mask gt Pv4 subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask Example Add SNMPv3 community entry Security Switch SNMP Community Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 community entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 community entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp community delete 3 Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 community entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup lt index gt 402 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 community entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp community lookup Idx Community Source IP Source Mask 192 168 0 20 255 255 255 0 2 private 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Number of entries 2 Security Switch SNMP User Add Description Add SNMPv3 user entry The entry index key are lt engineid gt and lt user_name gt and it doesn t allow modify Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Add lt engineid gt lt user_name gt MD5 SHA lt auth_password gt DES lt priv_password gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ff
182. SW 24040 WGSW 24040R QoS Port Classification Map Description Set or show the port classification map This map is used when port classification tag is enabled and the purpose is to translate the Priority Code Point PCP and Drop Eligible Indicator DEI from a tagged frame to QoS class and DP level Syntax QoS Port Classification Map lt port_list gt lt pcp_list gt lt dei_list gt lt class gt lt dpl gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt pcp_list gt PCP list or all default All PCPs 0 7 lt dei_list gt DEI list or all default All DEIs 0 1 lt class gt QoS class 0 7 lt dpl gt Drop Precedence Level 0 3 QoS Port Classification DSCP Description Set or show if the classification is based on DSCP value in IP frames Syntax QoS Port Classification DSCP lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable DSCP based classification disable Disable DSCP based classification default Show DSCP based classification mode Default Setting disable Example Enable QoS port classification DSCP WGSW 24040 gt qos Port Classification dscp 1 10 enable 486 QoS Port Policer Mode Description Set or show the port policer mode Syntax QoS Port Policer Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all defa
183. SW 24040 WGSW 24040R The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval in hundredths of a percent Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds kx Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt Updates
184. Set or show the STP adminEdge port parameter Syntax STP Port Edge lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Enable Configure MSTP adminEdge to Edge Disable Configure MSTP adminEdge to Non edge Default disable Example Enable STP edge function on port1 WGSW 24040 gt stp port edge 1 enable STP Port AutoEdge Description Set or show the STP autoEdge port parameter Syntax STP Port AutoEdge lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Enable Enable MSTP autoEdge 458 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Disable Disable MSTP autoEdge Default enable Example Disable STP edge function on port WGSW 24040 gt stp port autoedge 1 disable STP Port P2P Description Set or show the STP point2point port parameter Syntax STP Port P2P lt port_list gt enable disable auto Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP point2point disable Disable MSTP point2point auto Automatic MSTP point2point detection Default auto Example Disable STP P2P function on port WGSW 24040 gt stp port p2p 1 disable STP Port RestrictedRole Description Set or show the MSTP restrictedRole port parameter Syntax STP Port RestrictedRole lt port_list gt enable disable 459 User s Manual of
185. Set or show the mode of IPMC Proxy Syntax IPMC Proxy mldligmp enable disable Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC Proxy disable Disable IPMC Proxy default Show global IPMC Proxy mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP Proxy WGSW 24040 gt ipmc proxy igmp enable IPMC SSM Description Set or show the IPMC SSM Range Syntax IPMC SSM mldligmp Range lt prefix gt lt mask_len gt 928 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP range SSM Range keyword lt prefix gt IPv4 IPv6 multicast group address accordingly lt mask_len gt Mask length for IPv4 4 32 IPv6 8 128 ssm range accordingly IPMC VLAN Add Description Add the IPMC snooping VLAN interface Syntax IPMC VLAN Add mldligmp lt vid gt Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 IPMC VLAN Delete Description Delete the IPMC snooping VLAN interface Syntax IPMC VLAN Delete mld igmp lt vid gt Parameters mid igmp mid IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 929 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R IPMC State Description Set or show the IPMC snooping state for VLAN Syntax IPMC State mldligmp lt vid gt enable disable Parameters mi
186. Syntax IP NTP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable NTP mode disable Disable NTP mode default Show NTP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable NTP mode 354 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt ip ntp mode enable IP NTP Server Add Description Add NTP server entry Syntax IP NTP Server Add lt server_index gt lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Example To add NTP server WGSW 24040 gt ip ntp server add 1 60 249 136 151 IP NTP Server IPv6 Add Description Add NTP server IPv6 entry Syntax IP NTP Server Ipv6 Add lt server_index gt lt server_ipv6 gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 lt server_ipv6 gt IPv6 server address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four Example hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 To add IPv6 NTP server 355 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt ip ntp server ipv6 ad
187. The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new access entry Save Click to save changes _Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 87 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 4 Port Management Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s ports This section has the following items E Port Configuration Configures port connection settings E Port Statistics Overview Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics a Port Statistics Detail Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics E SFP Module Information Display SFP information E Port Mirror Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 4 4 1 Port Configuration This page displays current port configurations Ports can also be configured here The Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 4 1 appears Port Configuration Port Port Description Link z 3 Mata a c a aN O O O O d O d O 4 lt 4 IRRE EE 44 4 D a TEE ii E E Si E lt al i F lt Si a lt a E
188. Time MAC Table Learning Description Enables disables the the automatic aging of dynamic entries The time after which a learned entry is discarded By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Range 10 10000000 seconds Default 300 seconds If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Object e Auto e Disable e Secure Static MAC Table Configuration Description Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received No learning is done Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address Object e Delete e VLAN ID e MAC Address e Port Members e Adding a New Static Entry Description Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save The VLAN ID of the entry The MAC
189. Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 18 3 RMON Alarm Status This page provides an overview of RMON Alarm entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Alarm table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Alarm table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Alarm table screen in Figure 4 18 3 appears Port Statistics Overview Auto refresh L start tram Control Index o with 20 entries per page 1 Sample Startup Rising Rising Falling Falling Mo more entres Figure 4 18 3 Port Statistics Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID Indicates the index of Alarm control entry e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold e Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled e Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds e Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period e Startup Alarm The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid e Rising Threshold Rising threshold value 322
190. VID State Added Security Network Limit Configuration Description Show Limit Control configuration Syntax Security Network Limit Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show Limit Control configuration WGSW 24040 gt security network limit configuration Port Security Limit Control Configuration Disabled Disabled Port Mode Limit Action Security Network Limit Mode Description 416 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Age Hold Time Set or show global state Syntax Security Network Limit Mode enable disable Parameters enable Globally enable port security disable Globally disable port security User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R default Show current global enabledness of port security limit control Default Setting disable Example Enable the limit mode WGSW 24040 gt security network limit mode enable Security Network Limit Aging Description Set or show aging state Syntax Security Network Limit Aging enable disable Parameters enable Enable aging disable Disable aging default Show current enabledness of aging Default Setting disable Example Enable limit aging WGSW 24040 gt security network limit aging enable 417 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Network Limit Agetime Description Time in seconds b
191. VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation e VLAN ID Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and 203 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R cannot equal each port PVID It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 e Age Time Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning age time The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds It used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled In other cases it will based hardware age time The actual age time will be situated in the age_time 2 age_time interval e Traffic Class Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class All traffic on Voice VLAN will apply this class e Port Security Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Possible port modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation e Port Discovery Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol It will only work when auto Protocol detect mode is enabled We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to LLDP or Both Changing the discovery protocol to OUI o
192. Voice VLAN security mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the Voice VLAN port security mode for port 1 4 WGSW 24040 gt voice vlan security 1 4 enable Voice VLAN Discovery Protocol Description Set or show the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol mode It only work under auto detect mode is enabled We should enable LLDP feature before configure discovery protocol to LLDP or Both Change discovery protocol to OU or LLDP will restart auto detect process Syntax Voice VLAN Discovery Protocol lt port_list gt oui lldp both Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports OUI Detect telephony device by OUI address LLDP Detect telephony device by LLDP Both Both OUI and LLDP default Show Voice VLAN discovery protocol Default Setting OUI 922 6 20 Loop Protect Command Loop Protect Configuration Description Show Loop Protection configuration Syntax Loop Protect Configuration Loop Protect Mode Description Set or show the Loop Protection mode Syntax Loop Protect Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable Loop Protection disable Disable Loop Protection Default Setting enable Loop Protect Transmit Description Set or show the Loop Protection transmit interval Syntax Loop Protect Transmit lt transmit time gt Parameters Transmit time interval 1 10 seconds Default Setting 5 923 User s Manual of
193. WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to e Timeout The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions Fast will transmit LACP packets each second while Slow will wait for 30 seconds before sending a LACP packet e Priority The Prio controls the priority of the port If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group than is supported by this device then this parameter will control which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role Lower number means greater priority Buttons Save Click to save changes _Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 5 3 LACP System Status This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances The LACP Status page display the current LACP aggregation Groups and LACP Port status The LACP System Status screen in Figure 4 5 5 appears LACP System Status Agar ID Partner Partner Last Local System ID Key Changed Ports No ports enabled or no existing partners Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 5 5 LACP System Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id e Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner e Partner Key The Key that the partner ha
194. X IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000T Standards Compliance IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and Back pressure IEEE 802 3ad Port trunk with LACP 28 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R IEEE 802 1D Spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802 1ab LLDP RFC 768 UDP RFC 793 TFTP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP version 1 RFC 2236 IGMP version 2 RFC 3376 IGMP version 3 RFC 2710 MLD version 1 FRC 3810 MLD version 2 Environment pee Temperature 0 50 Degree C perating Relative Humidity 20 95 non condensing a Temperature 20 70 Degree C eelse Relative Humidity 20 95 non condensing 29 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 2 INSTALLATION This section describes the hardware features and installation of the Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount For easier management and control of the Managed Switch familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators Before connecting any network device to the Managed Switch please read this chapter completely 2 1 Hardware Description 2 1 1 Switch Front Panel The unit front panel provides a simple interface monitoring the switch Figure 2 1 amp Figure
195. able entry ID Print Print the system log entry to the current entry ID 4 2 13 Remote Syslog Configure remote syslog on this page The Remote Syslog screen in Figure 4 2 16 appears 66 The page includes the following fields Object e Mode e Syslog Server IP e Syslog Level Buttons Save Click to save changes User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R system Log Configuration Server Mode _ Mode Seva Address Syslog Level Level Figure 4 2 16 Remote Syslog page screenshot Description Indicates the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will send out to syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are Enabled Enable remote syslog mode operation Disabled Disable remote syslog mode operation Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server If the switch provide DNS feature it also can be a host name Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server Possible modes are Info Send informations warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
196. ace during this sampling interval in hundredths of a percent Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 18 9 RMON History Status This page provides an overview of RMON History entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the History table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the History table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest History Index and Sample Index found in the History table screen in Figure 4 18 9 appears RMON History Overview start from Control Index o and sample Index o with a entries per page History Sample Sample Broad Multi CRC a ae Octets Pkts eee ewer Ps Frag Jabb Coll Utilization Mo more entres Figure 4 18 9 RMON history overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e History Index Indicates the index of History control entry e Sample Index Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry e Sample Start The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources 328 Drops Octets Pkts Broadcast Multicast CRCErrors Undersize Oversize Frag Jabb Coll Utilization User s Manual of WG
197. active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network r Give me multicast a stream Multicast Receiver Multicast Transmitter IPTV Server Switch Give me multicast stream Multicast Receiver gt Switch Give me multicast a Stream m Multicast r d Receiver D Figure 4 8 1 Multicast Service 155 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Multicast Recelver 1 don t want the stream Multicast Transmitter A IPTV Server Switch Switch C Multicast Switch Receiver Idon twant the stream pa Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 8 2 Multicast flooding B Multicast Receiver Multicast Aam GMP Snooping Transmitter Switch A IPTV Server Router l IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Switch Switch C eS A IGMP Snooping Multicast Switch Receiver Figure 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping multicast stream control Multicast Receiver D 156 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicat
198. ad only Read write Aggregation Diagnostics IP 4 T 4 4 T 4 T 4 T 4 LLOP LLOP MED Loop Protect MAC Table MWR Mlaintenance o o 15 oo x T 4 T 4 4 4 ies 4 in S lt 4 T 4 4 Mirroring Multicast Port Security Ports Private WLANs Protocol based WLAN os SF low SNMP security T 4 T 4 T 4 4 T 4 T 4 S O 4 4 4 2 S S 4 4 4 T 4 T 4 spanning Tree system Slol S MEAN Slol S 115 Timer UPnP VLANs Voice WLAN 5 T 4 T 4 T 4 T 4 a sx hry 4 T 4 hry 4 4 5 Figure 4 2 7 Privilege Levels Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group Name The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them contains more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in details 96 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R System Contact Name Location Timezone Log Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dot1x port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriPHY Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY Maintenance CLI System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configura
199. address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt end_ipv6_addr gt End IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally Pv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 web Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS snmp Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP telnet Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH Example Add access management list from 2001 0001 to 2001 0100 via web interface WGSW 24040 gt security switch access add 2001 0001 2001 0100 web 390 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Switch Access Delete Description Delete access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Delete lt access_id gt Parameters lt access_id gt entr
200. address of the entry Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry Click Add New Static Entry to add a new entry to the static MAC table Specify the VLAN ID MAC address and port members for the new entry Click Save 283 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address The MAC Address Table screen in Figure 4 13 2 appears MAC Address Table start from VLAN and MAC address with 20 entries per page Iori O OO OOO SOSS O O PA IAS Static DO0 30 4F 55 66 44 Static 33 35 00 00 00 01 Static 33 33 00 00 00 02 Static 33 33 FF 55 66 44 static 33 33 FF AS 00 64 Dynamic 40 61 86 04 15 69 Static FF FF FF FF FF FF yf yw Vf vv vv vv Ww Figure 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status Navigating the MAC Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table The Start from
201. affic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled for all ports RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled for all ports A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Gu
202. allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled Specify the port state of this port The allowed values are Enabled To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module Disabled To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module The default value is Enabled Counts the number of frames that match this ACE Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Retresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone 219 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Clear Click to clear the counters 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 5 appears ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Rate Limiter ID 1 2 J fil 5 E fi a A adas NANA NA NA NA A A AA NAAA A A AA Figure 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Objec
203. als are marked V V amp FG 3 Loosen the three screws so you can slide the DC cable beneath it Insert the DC cable into the connector first and screw it down tight 4 Connect the power cable to the DC power supply After power up or reset the Managed Switch performs a cold start procedure Figure 2 20 48VDC connector Warni Before connect the DC power cable to the input terminal block of Managed Switch ensure that the arning power switch in the OFF position and the DC power is OFF 38 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device workstation or personal computer and the system lt also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics Requirements Management Access Overview Administration Console Access Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Requirements a Workstations of subscribers running Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista 7 2008 MAC OS9 or later Linux UNIX or other platform compatible with TCP IP protocols a Workstation installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card E Serial Port connect Terminal e Above PC with CO
204. alues 4 11 4 Network Access Overview This page provides an overview of the current NAS port states for the selected switch The Network Access Overview screen in Figure 4 11 5 appears Network Access Server Switch Status Admin State Port State Last ID QoS Class Port LAN ID Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized slobally Disabled I 0 0 E Od Pa 16 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 19 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 20 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 21 Force Authorized Globally Disabled A Force Authorized Globally Disabled 23 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 24 Force Authorized Globally Disabled Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 11 5 Network Access Server Switch Status page screenshot 237 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values e Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL fr
205. ame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e Last ID The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e QoS Class QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 11 5 Network Access Statistics This page provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication For MAC based ports it shows selected backend server RADIUS Authentication Server statistics only Use the port select box to select which port details to be displayed The Network Access Statistics screen in Figure 4 11 6 appears 238 The page includes the following fields Port State Object e Admin
206. ames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 213 e Ethernet m IP Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address space HRD settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP protocol address space PRO settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 1 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 Any Any value is allowed don t care The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type IPv4 is selected Object e IP Protocol Filter e IP Protocol Value e IP TTL e IP Fragment Description Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE Any No IP protocol filter is specified don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears ICMP Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter IP
207. ampling rate N is rounded off to the nearest supported value 539 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Syntax sFlow FlowSampler lt port_list gt lt sampling_rate gt lt max_hdr_size gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Default All ports lt sampling_rate gt Specifies the statistical sampling rate The sample rate is specified as N to sample 1 Nth of the packets in the monitored flows There are no restrictions on the value but the switch will adjust it to the closest possible sampling rate O disables sampling lt max_hdr_size gt Specifies the maximum number of bytes to transmit per flow sample Valid range is 14 200 bytes Default 128 bytes sFlow CounterPoller Description Set or show counter polling interval configuration per port Syntax sFlow CounterPoller lt port_list gt lt interval gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Default All ports lt interval gt Polling interval in range O 3600 Set to 0 to release this port s resources sFlow Statistics Receiver Description Get or clear receiver statistics Syntax sFlow Statistics Receiver clear Parameters clear Clear statistics 940 sFlow Statistics Samplers Description Get or clear per port statistics Syntax SFlow Statistics Samplers lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Default All ports clear Clear sta
208. anrnnenaneness 404 Securty SWITCH SO NMP USER LOOKUD ads id 405 Security Switch SNMP Group AdO oococccocccccccoccnccoccnnonoconononcnnnnnncnnonnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnnrnrrnnannrnnnnins 405 11 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Switch SNMP Group Delete o a ee 406 Security Switch SNMP Group o ee A A A A 406 SECURITY SWITCH SNMP VIEW ACG siise a ardent Shao t apne ad dl 407 Security Switch SNMP View Delete cooocccooccccocncccccnccocnccncnoconnnnnncnnoncnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnonnrnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnns 407 Security Switch SNMP View Lookup wisest ere etal eh eae tee a ee ae 408 Security SWIG SNMP ACCESS ACG susi ios 408 Security Switch SNMP Access Delete coooncccococonoconconocononconoconononcnnoconnnnononnnonnnrnnnnonnnnnnannnnnnnrnnoronrnnonananess 409 Security Switch SNMP Access LOOKUD cc ccccceeccceeeeeeeececeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceseeceseeesseesseeeeseeeeseneessneesseeeas 410 Security Switch RMON Statistics AA O ee NS eh ech ts OL 410 Security Switch RMON Statistics Delete ooocccoocccccocnccocnoconnnonocnnnncnconnnonnnnnonnnnonnrnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnonanens 410 Security Switch RMON Statistics Lookup cccccsececsseeceeeecceeeceeeeecaeeeceuaeceseeesaeeecaueecesaeeeeeeeeeesausessueesneetens 411 Security Switch RMON History Add cccccccsseecceesceccesscecceeeeeceuseeeceeececseeeesseeeeseseeeseu
209. ap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent everytime the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Boot the stack or elect a new masterthe switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the stackswitch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap amp Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken e State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown e Re open Button If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the ca
210. arameters for the switch level 138 Parameter Description User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Default Value Bridge Identifier Not user A combination of the User set priority and 32768 MAC configurable the switch s MAC address except by setting priority The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts below a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC Priority A relative priority for each switch lower 32768 numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds the hello message by the switch Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of a received BPDU fora 20 seconds port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer Forward Delay Timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Default Value Port Priority A relative priority for each 128 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports STP calculates path costs and selects the 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet
211. ard Ethernet Switching stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer do the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occurrence it is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table pro vided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability How ever the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to signifi cantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet are stored in a routing table This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall load on the network The Switch performs Store and forward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate No packet loss will occur 952 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 7 5 Auto Negotiation The STP ports on t
212. are Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type Ethernet Type is selected Object e EtherType Filter e Ethernet Type Value Description Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE Any No EtherType filter is specified EtherType filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE you can enter a specific EtherType value A field for entering a EtherType value appears When Specific is selected for the EtherType filter you can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x600 to OXFFFF but excluding 217 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 9 oO kez O iq LU O lt DL E YN E iq E eb E iq i q lt o gt A a Q Q 00 x lt O O a 14 A o SS 00 x lt O I gt Q o O 00 x lt O this EtherType value Buttons
213. are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object e Port e Mode e Limit Description The port number for which the configuration below applies Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The stackswitch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured 266 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses e Action If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP tr
214. arp_flags gt ARP flags request smac tmac len ip ether 0 1 any ip IP keyword lt protocol gt IP protocol number 0 255 or any lt ip_flags gt IP flags ttlloptions fragment 0 1 any icmp ICMP keyword lt icmp_type gt ICMP type number 0 255 or any lt icmp_code gt ICMP code number 0 255 or any udp UDP keyword lt sport gt Source UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any lt dport gt Destination UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any tcp TCP keyword lt tcp_flags gt TCP flags fin syn rst psh ack urg 0 1 any permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding 431 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_redirect gt Port number for copy of frames or disable lt logging gt System logging of frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable Security Network ACL Delete Description Delete ACE Syntax Security Network ACL Delete lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 512 Example Delete ACE 1 WGSW 24040 gt security network acl delete 1 Security Network ACL Lookup Description Show ACE default All ACEs Syntax Security Network ACL Lookup lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 512 Example Lookup ACE 1 WGSW 24040 gt security network acl lookup 1 432 Security Network ACL Clear Descrip
215. as defined in the following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class Fore example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class ll also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class 1 and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class Il and Generic Endpoints Class 1 LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class 1 The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class 1 definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class Il The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class and are exte
216. as trusted DSCP disable Set DSCP as un trusted DSCP default Show DSCP Trust status Default Setting disable QoS DSCP Classification Mode Description Set or show DSCP ingress classification mode 496 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R If port DSCP classification is selected DSCP will be classified based on QoS class and DP level only for DSCP value with classification mode enabled DSCP may be translated DSCP if translation is enabled for the port Syntax QoS DSCP Classification Mode lt dscp_list gt enable disable Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 list or all enable Enable DSCP ingress classification disable Disable DSCP ingress classification default Show DSCP classification mode Default Setting disable QoS DSCP Classification MAP Description Set or show DSCP ingress classification table This table is used to map DSCP from QoS class and DP level The DSCP which needs to be classified depends on port DSCP classification and DSCP classification mode Incoming frame DSCP may be translated beforeusing the value for classification Syntax QoS DSCP Classification Map lt class_list gt lt dpl_list gt lt dscp gt Parameters lt class_list gt QoS class list or all default All QoS classes 0 7 lt dpl_list gt DP level list or all default All DP levels 0 1 lt dscp gt Mapped DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Default Setti
217. assword Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication Without a secure connection User name Password Remember my password Cancel Figure 4 1 2 Login screen Default User name admin Default Password admin After entering the username and password the main screen appears as Figure 4 1 3 45 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 14 16 18 ad 21 WOSW 24040R System SNMP Port Management Link Aggregation VLANS Spanning Tree Welcome to PLANET Multicast LO Access Control List W G S W ii 2 4 0 4 0 R 4Uthentication Security 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 SFP MAC Address Table LLDP Management Switch Dlagnostics Loop Protection PLANET Technology Corporation gt ap 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R 0 C RMON Tel 886 2 2219 9518 HELP Fax OG 2 Toes Email Support planet cam tw Copyrighte2012 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 4 1 3 Default main page Now you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web page let you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides 1 It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Managed Switch The changed IP
218. ate VLAN This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN The Port Isolation screen in Figure 4 6 7 appears 121 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Auto refresh L Port Isolation Configuration Port Number 112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 MNOOOUOOUOOUOOUOOOOOOOOOUOUOOOO Figure 4 6 7 Port Isolation Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port By default port isolation is disabled on all ports Buttons save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 6 10 VLAN setting example El Separate VLAN m 802 1Q VLAN Trunk E Port Isolate 4 6 10 1 Two separate 802 1Q VLAN The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handle Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLAN Each VLAN isolate network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic fro
219. ate to another as follows From initialization switch boot to blocking From blocking to listening or to disabled From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled From forwarding to disabled From disabled to blocking 137 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R oo Blocking Listening Disable Learning Figure 4 7 1 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Bridge and the Designated Bridges On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports The following are the user configurable STP p
220. ation Fast Start Repeast Count 4 Location Coordinates Latitude 0 0000 North Longitude 0 0000 East Altitude 0 0000 meter s Map datum WGS84 Civic Address Location Policies none none none none LLDPMED Civic Description Set or show LLDP MED Civic Address Location 478 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Syntax LLDPMED Civic country state county city district block street leading_street_direction trailing street_suffix str_suf house_ no jhouse_no_s uffixllandmarkladditional_infolnamejzip_codelbuildinglapartmentjfloorlroom_number place typelpostal com_namelp_o_ boxladditional_code lt civic_value gt Parameters country Country state National subdivisions state caton region province prefecture county County parish gun JP district IN city City townchip shi JP district City division borough city district ward chou JP block Neighborhood block street Street leading_street direction Leading street direction trailing street_suffix Trailing street suffix str_suf Street Suffix house_no House Number house_no_ suffix House number suffix landmark Landmark or vanity address additional_ info Additional location information name Bame residence and office occupant Zip code Postal zip code building Building structure apartment Unit apartment suite floor Floor room_number Room number place type Placetype postal _com_na
221. ation mode operation When enable DHCP relay information mode operation the agent insert specific information option82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and remove it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled Disabled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy When enable DHCP relay information mode operation if agent receive a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy And it only works under DHCP relay information operation mode enabled Possible policies are Replace Replace the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it Keep Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it 61 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Drop Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains relay information Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 9 DHCP Relay Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP relay The DHCP Relay Statistics screen in Figure 4 2 12 appears DHCP Relay Statistics Server Statistics Transmit to Transmit Receive from Receive Missing Agent Receive Missing Receive Missing Receive Bad Receive Bad Server Error Server Option Circuit ID Remote ID Circu
222. ators radiusAuthClientExtU nknown Types radiusAuthClientExtP acketsDropped The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes received from the server The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason e Other Info User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Tx Access Requests Tx Access Retransmissio ns Tx Pending Requests Tx Timeouts radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRequests radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRetransmission S radiusAuthClientExtP endingRequests radiusAuthClientExtT imeouts The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to the RADIUS authenti
223. based on DSCP value DSCP value used to map QoS class and DPL is either translated DSCP value or incoming frame DSCP value Syntax QoS DSCP Map lt dscp_list gt lt class gt lt dpl gt Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 list or all default Show DSCP ingress map table i e DSCP gt class DPL lt class gt QoS class 0 7 lt dpl gt Drop Precedence Level 0 3 495 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R QoS DSCP Translation Description Set or show global ingress DSCP translation table If port DSCP translation is enabled translation table is used to translate incoming frames DSCP value and translated value is used to map QoS class and DP level Syntax QoS DSCP Translation lt dscp_list gt lt trans_dscp gt Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 list or all default Show DSCP translation table lt trans_dscp gt Translated DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 QoS DSCP Trust Description Set or show trusted DSCP value which is used for QoS classification The DSCP value to be checked for trust is either translated value ifDSCP translation is enabled for the ingress port or incoming frame DSCPvalue if translation is disabled for the port Trusted DSCP value is onlyused for QoS classification Syntax QoS DSCP Trust lt dscp_list gt enable disable Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 list or all enable Set DSCP
224. be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object e Port e Admin State Description The port number for which the configuration below applies If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses 231 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supp
225. ble Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap authentication failure disable Disable SNMP trap authentication failure default Show SNMP trap authentication failure mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap authentication failure WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp trap authentication failure disable 397 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Switch SNMP Trap Link up Description Set or show the port link up and link down trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Link up enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap link up and link down disable Disable SNMP trap link up and link down default Show SNMP trap link up and link down mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap link up WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp trap link up disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap inform disable Disable SNMP trap inform default Show SNMP inform mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap inform mode 398 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp trap inform mode disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform timeout usecs Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Ti
226. ble Shutdown Port Enable Shutdown Port Enable Shutdown Port Enable shutdown Port Enable Shutdown Port Enable Shutdown Port Enable Figure 4 16 1 Loop protection configuration page screenshot lt lt lt e El El El E 311 The page includes the following fields General Settings Object e Enable Loop Protection e Transmission Time e Shutdown Time Port Configuration Object e Port e Enable e Action e Tx Mode Buttons Save Click to save changes User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Description Controls whether loop protections is enabled as a whole The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port valid values are 1 to 10 seconds The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is detected and the port action shuts down the port Valid values are O to 604800 seconds 7 days A value of zero will keep a port disabled until next device restart Description The switch port number of the port Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port Valid values are Shutdown Port Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU s or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU s Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to p
227. blic value in SNMP write community WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp write community public 394 Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode Description Set or show the SNMP trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP traps disable Disable SNMP traps default Show SNMP trap mode Default Setting disable Example Enable SNMP trap mode User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp trap mode enable Security Switch SNMP Trap Version Description Set or show the SNMP trap protocol version Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Version 1 2c 3 Parameters 1 SNMP version 1 2c SNMP version 2c 3 SNMP version 3 default Show SNMP trap version Default Setting 1 Example Set SNMP trap version in version 2c 395 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp trap version 2c Security Switch SNMP Trap Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP traps Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string Maximum length allowed is upto 256 characters default Show SNMP trap community Default Setting public Example Set private value for SNMP trap community WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp trap community private Security Switch SN
228. bps full duplex 1000x_ams_ 1000BASE X with automatic media sense 1000x 1000BASE X default Show configured and current mode Default Setting Auto Example Set 10Mbps half duplex speed for port1 WGSW 24040 gt port mode 1 10hdx Port Flow Control Description Set or show the port flow control mode Syntax Port Flow Control lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable flow control disable Disable flow control default Show flow control mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable flow control function for port1 358 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt port flow control 1 enable Port State Description Set or show the port administrative state Syntax Port State lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port disable Disable port default Show administrative mode Default Setting Enable Example Disable port WGSW 24040 gt port state 1 disable Port Maximum Frame Description Set or show the port maximum frame size Syntax Port MaxFrame lt port_list gt lt max_frame gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt max_frame gt Port maximum frame size 1518 9600 default Show maximum frame size Default Setting 9600 399 User s
229. c group address from the source IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not Buttons Auto refresh Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields ke Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MLD SFM Information Table gt gt Es Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 8 14 MVR The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLANs In a multicast television application a PC or a network television or a set top box can receive the multicast stream Multiple set top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port When a subscriber selects a channel the set top box or PC sends an IGMP MLD report message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast group address Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports It is allowed to create at maximun 8 MVR VLANs with corresponding channel settings for each Multicast VLAN There will be totally at maximun 256 group addresses for channel settings This page provides MVR related configuration The MVR screen in Figure 4 8 17 appears 174 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MVR Configurations Amada Dc VLAN Interface Setting Role I Inactive S Source R Recelver Delete MVR VID MWR Name M
230. c7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt ipv6_prefix gt IPv6 subnet mask default Show IPv6 prefix lt ipv6_router gt IPv6 router default Show IPv 6 router IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Default Setting IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Address fe80 6082 cdb9 19ab c0e2 IPv6 Address 192 168 0 100 392 IPv6 Prefix IPv6 Router Example User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 96 Set IPv6 address WGSW 24040 gt ip ipv6 setup 2001 0002 64 2100 0001 IPv6 Ping Description Ping IPv6 address ICMPv6 echo Syntax IP IPv6 Ping6 lt ipv6_addr gt Length lt ping_length gt Count lt ping_count gt Interval lt ping_interval gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt length lt ping_length gt count lt ping_count gt interval IPv6 host address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represe
231. cast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 16 appears storm Control Configuration Frame Type oa Rate Unicast Multicast s Broadcast F Figure 4 9 16 Storm Control Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here Unicast Multicast or Broadcast e Enable Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type e Rate The rate unit is packets per second pps Valid values are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 1 QoS Statistics This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports The QoS Statistics screen in Figure 4 9 18 appears 201 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Queuing Counters Auto refresh LJ g Ory TT J i SSO SO DO A o O o O 0 O o O 0 O o O 0 O o St O P
232. cation server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject Access Challenge timeout or retransmission The number of authentication timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout Asend to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4668 Name IP Address 252 Description IP address and UDP port for the authentication server in question RADIUS Accounting Servers State Round Tri radiusAuthClient p Time e ExtRoundTrip Tim User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Shows the state of the server lt takes one of the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has te
233. ccconccnccoccnccnoconcnnncnnnnnncnnonnrnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnrnnrnrrnnrnnnnnannns 428 Securty NE WO ACA a a aed ee 429 Securty NEWWOIK AGI Polar ues leat sees a das ii 429 Security Network AC Li RAG secado dira 430 Security Network ACL Add ccccccccccsseeccceeeeceececcescecceueeesseeesseueeessuseessaeeeeseeeecseueeessesessegeeesseeeeesseesesseneeesaags 430 Security Network ACL Delete e a a ee Ne e le O 432 Security Network ACL LOU aes als ce eee ee ete EE 432 Security Network AC OS aia 433 Security Network ACL Salsa td ti 433 Security Network ACL Port state ll a eed ee eae 434 Security Network DHCP Relay ConfiguratiON ccoooccccconconoconnncocononononcnnoconcnnonononononcnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnranononcncnnaneness 434 Security Network DHCP Relay Mode score A a 434 Security Network DHCP Relay SelVeT ooooooccccoccccccoccnconocononnnconononcnnononnnnonnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnranrnnrnnnnannnns 435 Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode ooccccccoccnccccccnccoccnnonoconononcnnononnnnonnnnnnnnnrnnonnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnonanons 436 Security Network DHCP Relay Information PoliCy oooccccocccnccoocnnonoccnccnncnnononcnnnnnncnnonnrnnononrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnncnns 436 Security Network DACP Relay StatistiCS sissioni a sl 437 Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration ccccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeesseeeeeseeeeesaeeesseeeeeas 437 Security Network DHCP Snoopin
234. ce Guard Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable IP Source Guard disable Disable IP Source Guard Default Setting disable Example Enable IP source guard mode WGSW 24040 gt security network ip source guard mode enable Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode Description Set or show the IP Source Guard port mode Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable IP Source Guard disable Disable IP Source Guard Default Setting disable Example Enable IP source guard port mode WGSW 24040 gt security network ip source guard port mode enable 440 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Network IP Source Guard Limit Description Set or show the IP Source Guard port limitation for dynamic entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard limit lt port_list gt lt dynamic_entry_limit gt unlimited Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dynamic_entry_limit gt unlimited dynamic entry limit 0 2 or unlimited Default Setting unlimited Example Set IP source guard limit WGSW 24040 gt security network ip source guard 1 1 Security Network IP Source Guard Entry Description Add or delete IP source guard static entry Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_ip gt lt ip mask gt Parameters lt port_list
235. ce ports The default is Dynamic mode Specify whether the traversed IGMP MLD control frames will be sent as Untagged or Tagged with MVR VID The default is Tagged Specify how the traversed IGMP MLD control frames will be sent in prioritized manner The default Priority is O Define the maximun time to wait for GMP MLD report memberships on a receiver port before removing the port from multicast group membership The value is in units of tenths of a seconds The range is from 0 to 31744 The default LLQI is 5 tenths or one half second When the MVR VLAN is created click the Edit symbol to expand the corresponding multicast channel settings for the specific MVR VLAN Summary about the Interface Channel Setting of the MVR VLAN will be shown besides the Edit symbol The logical port for the settings Configure an MVR port of the designated MVR VLAN as one of the following roles Inactive The designated port does not participate MVR operations Source Configure uplink ports that receive and send multicast data as source ports Subscribers cannot be directly connected to source ports Receiver Configure a port as a receiver port if it is a subscriber port and should only receive multicast data It does not receive data unless it becomes a member of the multicast group by issuing IGMP MLD messages Be Caution MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management VLAN ports Select the port role by clicking the Role symb
236. cess 1 10 0 7 enable QoS Port TagRemarking Mode Description Set or show the port tag remarking mode Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking Mode lt port_list gt classified defaultimapped Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports classified Use classified PCP DEI values default Use default PCP DEl values 491 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level default Show port tag remarking mode Default Setting classified Example Set the port tag remarking mode in mapped WGSW 24040 gt qos Port TagRemarking Mode 1 10 mapped QoS Port TagRemarking PCP Description Set or show the default PCP This value is used when port tag remarking mode is set to default Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking PCP lt port_list gt lt pcp gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt pcp gt Priority Code Point 0 7 Default Setting 0 Example Set the default PCP in 1 WGSW 24040 gt qos Port TagRemarking PCP 1 10 1 QoS Port TagRemarking DEI Description Set or show the default DEI This value is used when port tag remarking mode is set to default Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking DEI lt port_list gt lt dei gt 492 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dei gt Drop Eligible Indicator 0
237. ch Access Mode Description Set or show the access management mode Syntax Security Switch Access Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable access management disable Disable access management default Show access management mode Default Setting disable Example Enable access management function WGSW 24040 gt security switch access mode enable Security Switch Access Add Description Add access management entry default Add all supported protocols Syntax Security Switch Access Add lt access_id gt lt start_ip_addr gt lt end_ip_addr gt web snmp telnet Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 lt start_ip_addr gt Start IP address a b c d 389 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt end_ip_addr gt End IP address a b c d web Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS snmp Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP telnet Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH Example Add access management list from 192 168 0 1 to 192 168 0 200 via web interface Security Switch Access IPv6 Add Description Add access management IPv6 entry default Add all supported protocols Syntax Security Switch Access lpv6 Add lt access_id gt lt start_ipv6_addr gt lt end_ipv6_addr gt web snmp telnet Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 lt start_ipv6_addr gt Start IPv6
238. ch using sampling technology The sFlow collector is for formatting the sample data statistic which is to be forwarded to the sFlow analyzer which will analyze the sample data and perform corresponding measure according to the result Our switch here acts as the proxy and central data collector in the sFlow system We have achieved data sampling and statistic targeting physical port Our data sample includes the IPv4 and IPv6 packets Extensions of other types are not supported so far As for non IPv4 and IPv6 packet the unify HEADER mode will be adopted following the requirements in RFC3176 copying the head information of the packet based on analyzing the type of its protocol The latest sFlow protocol presented by InMon Company is the version 5 Since it is the version 4 which is realized in the RFC3176 version conflict might exist in some case such as the structure and the packet format This is because the version 5 has not become the official protocol so in order to be compatible with current applications we will continue to follow the RFC3176 313 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 17 1 sFlow Configuration This page allows for configuring sFlow The configuration is divided into two parts Configuration of the sFlow receiver a k a sFlow collector and configuration of per port flow and counter samplers sFlow configuration is not persisted to non volatile memory which means that a reboot will disable sFlow sampling scree
239. cially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality WEP is an acronym for Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a deprecated algorithm to secure IEEE 802 11 wireless networks Wireless networks broadcast messages using radio so are more susceptible to eavesdropping than wired networks When introduced in 1999 WEP was intended to provide confidentiality comparable to that of a traditional wired network Wikipedia WiFi is an acronym for Wireless Fidelity It is meant to be used generically when referring of any type of 802 11 network whether 802 11b 802 11a dual band etc The term is promulgated by the Wi Fi Alliance WPA is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access It was created in response to several serious weaknesses researchers had found in the previous system Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP WPA implements the majority of the IEEE 802 11i standard and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while 802 11i was prepared WPA is specifically designed to also work with pre WPA wireless network interface cards through firmware upgrades but not 9 4 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R necessarily with first generation wireless access points WPA2 implements the full standard but will not work with some older network cards Wikipedia WPA P
240. ck the configuration button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose saved Choose file Look in B Config Backup E y E E 2 iico nfig xml My Recent Documents na A Desktop Mu Documents My Computer My Network File name config xm Places Files of type E Files Lancel Figure 4 2 25 Windows file selection menu popup Upload 2 Select on the configuration file then click Vrea J the bottom of the browser shows the upload status 3 After down the main screen appears Transfer Completed 73 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 2 19 Image Select This page provides information about the active and alternate backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the alternate image The web page displays two tables with information about the active and alternate firmware images The Image Select screen in Figure 4 2 26 appears 1 In case the active firmware image is the alternate image only the Active Image table is shown In this case the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled 2 If the alternate image is active due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this 3 The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases This does
241. cs WGSW 24040 gt lldp statistics 1 LLDP global counters Neighbor entries was last changed at 18819 sec ago Total Neighbors Entries Added 0 Total Neighbors Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbors Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out 0 LLDP local counters Port Rx Rx Rx TLV RxTLV RxTLV Errors Discards Errors Unknown Organz Aged 476 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R LLDP Info Description Show LLDP neighbor device information Syntax LLDP Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports LLDP CDP Aware Description Set or show if discovery information from received CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol frames is added to the LLDP neighbor table Syntax LLDP cdp_aware lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable CDP awareness CDP discovery information is added to the LLDP neighbor table disable Disable CDP awareness default Show CDP awareness configuration 477 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 12 LLDPMED Command LLDPMED Configuration Description Show LLDP MED configuration Syntax LLDPMED Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LLDP MED configuration of port1 4 WGSW 24040 gt lldpmed configuration 1 4 LLDP MED Configur
242. cters from 32 to 126 81 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Configuration 4 3 5 1 SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page The entry index key is Community The SNMPv3 Communities screen in Figure 4 3 4 appears SNMPv3 Community Configuration private 0000 Figure 4 3 4 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string e Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask e Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 82 4 3 5 2 SNMPv3 Users User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Configure SNMPv3 users table on thi
243. ction parameter takes the following values North North Valid for latitude South South Valid for latitude West West Valid for longitude East East Valid for longitude Meters Meters Valid for altitude Floor Floor Valid for altitude coordinate_value Coordinate value LLDPMED Datum Description Set or show LLDP MED Coordinates map datum Syntax LLDPMED Datum lt datum_type gt Parameters lt datum_type gt The datum_type parameter takes the following values wgs84 WGS84 nad83_navd88 NAD83_NAVD88 nad83_mllw NAD83_MLLW 482 LLDPMED Fast Description Set or show LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count Syntax LLDPMED Fast lt count gt Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt count gt The number of times the fast start LLDPDU are being sent during the activation of the fast start mechanism defined by LLDP MED 1 10 LLDPMED Info Description Show LLDP MED neighbor device information Syntax LLDPMED Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 483 6 13 Quality of Service Command QoS Configuration Description Show QoS Configuration Syntax QoS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports QoS Port Classification Class Description Set or show the default QoS class User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R
244. d 1 2001 7b8 3 2c 123 IP NTP Server Delete Description Delete NTP server entry Syntax IP NTP Server Delete lt server_index gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 Example To delete NTP server WGSW 24040 gt ip ntp server delete 1 356 6 3 Port Management Command Port Configuration Description Show port configuration Syntax Port Configuration lt port_list gt up down Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports up Show ports which are up down Show ports which are down default Show all ports Example Display port1 4 status WGSW 24040 gt port configuration 1 4 Port Configuration Port State Mode Flow Control Description Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Port Mode Description Set or show the port speed and duplex mode Syntax User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MaxFrame Power Excessive Link Disabled Discard Disabled Discard Disabled Discard Disabled Discard Port Mode lt port_list gt auto 10hdx 10fdx 100hdx 100fdx 1000fdx 1000x_ams 1000x 397 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Auto negotiation of speed and duplex 10hdx 10 Mbps half duplex 10fdx 10 Mbps full duplex 100hdx 100 Mbps half duplex 100fdx 100 Mbps full duplex 1000fdx 1 G
245. d Sacer ts uke is 472 LED MOG cs a ea ee ech eased ce de 472 EDP ORTONA TEN sets eee eprtset es eee E ae E aaioeeagteaaeees eet E tec ae aeeu saan 473 HTS Fe VA scree stedeeyaae Sees ac asta EE seats aereeih oa ice suse ci oc amar oauanet desde cuneate ancoeg cute penanere seta necenoaname 474 o Sess accas nsec te E cectg ace cts E dasedeaastassesee E esedssasta deena oer essence 474 LDP D l sit a A AAA EA ETE A A ae A 475 ELDER EINE ana o iaeudee u aueasiasasdtes acim neencnsmeetnoeaaes 475 BB e AO 476 A EA PO A A E a ucttencead eaten 477 LE DP GDP AWG is is ee I eo ashe eae A 477 6 12 LLDPMED COMM AM i 478 LLDPMED SoOnIgquralO astas dd tao sean ote set cscs encased 478 BE 1 Lea CIVIC o lei does aso 478 EEDPMED A nn nn em Oe ec ea Ree 479 LUDPMED Polly Delete cua e ae ole aS eh a et A e AN Nd a A e Seah ad oe 480 LEDPMED Poley Ad e ee 480 A e et ee 481 ELDPMED COOIAMAteS eisrean ei eiae Mavens sues ei a ae labels 482 LEDPMED Dattma e e a o A i 482 PEDEMED Pastis id a lo ret cee eats 483 Bo e A ere nnn ern 483 6 13 Quality Of Servico COMMANG sssaaa eaaa sanai aaia la AAA A A AAA 484 COS CONUAT soeia iaa 484 OOS Porm ClaSsiliGatlOn Class dida AAA ia 484 Q09 Pott Classification DP Li A A A A A T 484 QOS POr ClassifiGatl Ont AG iia cine id 485 dos Port ClaSSit Gaon IV ADA ea 486 0105 Por Classification DD SEP AAA AAA AAA AAA AA AAA 486 GOS Por Pollcsr Mode iS 487 QOS PO Oller rales old doi 487 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 W
246. d igmp mid IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs enable Enable MLD snooping disable Disable MLD snooping Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP snooping state for VLAN 1 WGSW 24040 gt ipmc state igmp 1 enable IPMC Querier Description Set or show the IPMC snooping querier mode for VLAN Syntax IPMC Querier mid igmp lt vid gt enable disable Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs enable Enable MLD querier disable Disable MLD querier 930 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Default Setting enable Example Enable IGMP querier for VLAN 1 WGSW 24040 gt ipmc querier igmp 1 enable IPMC Compatibility Description Set or show the IPMC Compatibility Syntax IPMC Compatibility mld igmp lt vid gt auto v1 v2 v3 Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs auto v1 v2 v3 auto Auto Compatibility Default Value v1 Forced Compatibility of IGMPv1 or MLDv1 v2 Forced Compatibility of IGMPv2 or MLDv2 v3 Forced Compatibility of IGMPv3 default Show IPMC Interface Compatibility IPMC Fastleave Description Set or show the IPMC snooping fast leave port mode Syntax IPMC Fastleave mld i
247. database on the switch stack for authentication radius use a remote RADIUS server for authentication tacacs use a remote TACACS server for authentication e Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to something else than none or local Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 11 3 Network Access Server Configuration This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X and MAC based authentication system and port settings The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication One or more central servers the backend servers determine whether the user is allowed access to the network These backend RADIUS servers are configured on the Configuration Security AAA page The IEEE802 1X standard defines port based operation but non standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below MAC based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port and doesn t require the user to have special 802 1X supplicant software installed on his system The switch uses the user s M
248. ddr Pv4 IPv6 multicast group address accordingly IPMC Router Description Set or show the IPMC snooping router port mode Syntax IPMC Router mld igmp lt port_list gt autojfix none Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Enable IGMP router mode auto fix Enable IGMP router mode fix none Enable IGMP router mode none IPMC Status Description 933 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Show IPMC operational status accordingly Syntax IPMC Status mldligmp lt vid gt Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs Example Show VLAN 1 IPMC operational status WGSW 24040 gt ipmc status igmp 1 IPMC Groups Description Show IPMC group addresses accordingly Syntax IPMC Groups mlid igmp lt vid gt Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs Example Show VLAN 1 IPMC group addresses accordingly WGSW 24040 gt ipmc groups igmp 1 IPMC Version Description Show IPMC Versions 934 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Syntax IPMC Version mid igmp lt vid gt Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095
249. de operation Allow select the time zone according to current location of switch Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 7 UPnP Configure UPnP on this page UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components The UPnP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 9 appears UPnP Configuration Mode m js Advertsing Duration 10 Figure 4 2 9 UPnP Configuration page screenshot 58 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are Enabled Enable UPnP mode operation Disabled Disable UPnP mode operation When the mode is enabled two ACEs are added automatically t
250. ded on the respective VLAN member ports Buttons Static Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh Lt Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately k Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 6 7 VLAN Port Status This page provides VLAN Port Staus The VLAN Port Status screen in Figure 4 6 5 appears 117 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R VLAN Port Status for Static User EDILES Port Type Ingress Filtering Frame Type TxTag UYID Unaware Unaware UnAware Unaware UnAware UnAware LnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware Unaware Unaware Unaware Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_ this ie this thi Untag_ this Untag_ this Untag_ this Untag_ this Untag_ this Untag_this Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 6 5 VLAN Port Status for Static User page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Port PVID Port Type Ingress Filtering Frame Type Tx Tag UVID Description The logical port for the settings contained in t
251. default Show SNMP mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP mode User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp mode disable Security Switch SNMP Version Description Set or show the SNMP protocol version Syntax Security Switch SNMP Version 1 2c 3 Parameters 1 SNMP version 1 2c SNMP version 2c 3 SNMP version 3 default Show SNMP version Default Setting 2c Example Set SNMP in version 3 WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp version 3 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Switch SNMP Read Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP read access Syntax Security Switch SNMP Read Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string Maximum length allowed is upto 256 characters default Show SNMP read community Default Setting public Example Set SNMP read community private WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp read community private Security Switch SNMP Write Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP write access Syntax Security Switch SNMP Write Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string Maximum length allowed is upto 256 characters default Show SNMP write community Default Setting private Example Set pu
252. defined for WEP The key used for encryption in TKIP is 128 bits and changes the key used for each packet UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified
253. ding non blocking switch fabric and wire speed throughput as high as 48Gbps which greatly simplifies the tasks of upgrading the LAN for catering to increase bandwidth demands Robust Layer 2 Features The Managed Switch can be programmed for basic switch management functions such as port speed configuration Port aggregation VLAN Spanning Tree protocol QoS bandwidth control and IGMP Snooping The Managed Switch provides 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Q in Q VLAN trunning and private VLAN the VLAN groups allowed on the Managed Switch will be maximally up to 255 Via supporting port aggregation the Managed Switch allows the operation of a high speed trunk combining multiple ports up to eight groups of maximum to 8 ports for trunking and it supports fail over as well Excellent Traffic Control The Managed Switch is loaded with powerful traffic management and QoS features to enhance services offered by telecoms The functionality includes QoS features such as wire speed Layer 4 traffic classifiers and bandwidth limiting that are particular useful for multi tenant unit multi business unit Telco or Network Service Provide applications It also empowers the enterprises to take full advantages of the limited network resources and guarantees the best performance at VoIP and Video conferencing transmission Efficient Management For efficient management the series of Managed Switch is equipped with console WEB and SNMP management interfaces With its bu
254. do the addition of new MAC based VLANs Buttons l New Enty Click to add a new MAC based VLAN entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Click to refresh the page immediately kx Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC based VLAN Table Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 6 12 MAC based VLAN Status This page shows MAC based VLAN entries configured by various MAC based VLAN users The MAC based VLAN Status screen in Figure 4 6 18 appears MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static Static Auto refresh d Port Members ort embers mac address vian o a 2 3 alse jelo poiesis Mo data exists forthe user CC Mo data exista for the User Figure 4 6 18 MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration for User Static page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry 130 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retesh J Click to refresh the page immediately 4 6 13 IP
255. ducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features a Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong to multiple VLANs Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices Priority tagging Ml IEEE 802 10 Standard IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers m The tagging feature allows V
256. e Enable MVR mode WGSW 24040 gt mvr mode enable MVR VLAN Setup Description Set or show per MVR VLAN configuration Syntax MVR VLAN Setup lt mvid gt add del upd Name lt mvr_name gt Parameters lt mvid gt MVR VLAN ID 1 4095 add Add operation del Delete operation upd Update operation name MVR Name keyword lt mvr_name gt MVR VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters MVR VLAN Mode Description Set or show per MVR VLAN mode Syntax MVR VLAN Mode lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt dynamic compatible 911 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt MVR VLAN ID 1 4095 or Name Maximum of 32 characters dynamic Dynamic MVR mode compatible Compatible MVR mode default Show MVR VLAN mode MVR VLAN Port Description Set or show per MVR VLAN port role Syntax MVR VLAN Port lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt lt port_list gt source receiverlinactive Parameters lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt MVR VLAN ID 1 4095 or Name Maximum of 32 characters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports source MVR source port receiver MVR receiver port Inactive Disable MVR default Show MVR port role MVR VLAN LLQI Description Set or show per MVR VLAN LLQI Last Listener Query Interval Syntax MVR VLAN LLQI lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt mvr_param_llqi Parameters lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt MVR VLAN ID
257. e range 0 7 When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be 234 e Guest VLAN Enabled User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following cr
258. e untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message default Show flow DHCP snooping port mode Default Setting trusted Example Set untrusted DHCP snooping port mode in port 1 WGSW 24040 gt security network dhcp snooping port mode 1 untrusted 438 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics Description Show or clear DHCP snooping statistics Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear DHCP snooping statistics Example Show DHCP snooping statistics of port 1 WGSW 24040 gt security network dhcp snooping statistics 1 Port 1 Statistics Rx Discover O Tx Discover Rx Offer O Tx Offer Rx Request O Tx Request Rx Decline O Tx Decline Rx ACK 0 Tx ACK Rx NAK O Tx NAK Rx Release O Tx Release Rx Inform O Tx Inform Rx Lease Query O Tx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned O Tx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown O Tx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active O Tx Lease Active Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration Description Show IP source guard configuration Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration 439 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Network IP Source Guard Mode Description Set or show IP source guard mode Syntax Security Network IP Sour
259. e DMZ are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment but are not allowed to communicate with each other 120 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Promiscuous Public Servers Permit WGSW 24040 a aaas nu 3 gt gt o gt Access Deny Access Deny Access Deny Private VLAN T mp a g Promiscuous Isolate Isolate ee For private VLANSs to be applied the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation When this is in place one or more of the configured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups E Promiscuous ports Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN a Isolated ports Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied When traffic comes in on an isolated port the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the priv
260. e telnet Settings for telnet ssh Settings for ssh web Settings for web default Set or show the specific client authentication method none Authentication disabled local Use local authentication radius Use remote RADIUS authentication tacacs Use remote TACACS authentication default Show client authentication method enable Enable local authentication if remote authentication fails disable Disable local authentication if remote authentication fails The parameter is effective when it is typed Default Setting disable Example Use RADIUS authentication method for telnet WGSW 24040 gt security switch auth method telnet radius enable 385 Security Switch SSH Configuration Description Show SSH configuration Syntax Security Switch SSH Configuration Example Show SSH configuration WGSW 24040 gt security switch ssh configuration SSH Configuration SSH Mode Enable Security Switch SSH Mode Description Set or show the SSH mode Syntax Security Switch SSH Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SSH disable Disable SSH default Show SSH mode Default Setting enable Example Enable SSH function User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security switch ssh mode enable 386 Security Switch HTTPs Configuration Description Show HTTPS configuration Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Configuration Example Sh
261. e Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth An SNMP managed network consists of three key components Network management stations NMSs SNMP agents Management information base MIB and network management protocol Network management stations NMSs Sometimes called consoles these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMSs are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapixel color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network elements They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management pro
262. e Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network To start a Telnet session the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password Then the client user can enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provides directory service and security features ToS is an acronym for Type of Service It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority control It is fully decoded to 972 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R determine the priority from the 6 bit ToS field in the IP header The most significant 6 bits of the ToS field are fully decoded into 64 possibilities and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the Pv4 ToS priority control bit 0 63 TLV is an acronym for Type Length Value A LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information Each of these pieces of information is known as TLV TKIP is an acronym for Temporal Key Integrity Protocol It used in WPA to replace WEP with a new encryption algorithm TKIP comprises the same encryption engine and RC4 algorithm
263. e Users column in the port status table The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the switch and a number of columns which are Object e Port e Users e State e MAC Count Current Limit Description The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter has enabled port security Shows the current state of the port It can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as bl
264. e World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP 962 HTTPS ICMP User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic
265. e and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx XX XX XX XX that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this 233 e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can b
266. e used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assignea This option is only available for single client modes i e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule e All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 7 which translates into the desired QoS Class in th
267. e user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 11 appears MSTI Configuration Add VLANs separated by spaces or comma Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST The default bridge instance Configuration Identification Configuration Name 00504 10 08 00 Configuration Revision o MSTI Mapping MSTI LANs Mapped Figure 4 7 11 MSTI Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Configuration Identification Object Description 149 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Configuration Name The name identifiying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters e Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 MSTI Mapping Object Description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped e VLANs Mapped The list of VLAN s mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI A unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it Buttons Save Click to save change
268. e when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Response Time Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query The IGMP Type codes are shown below Mg MS Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is Present ME Membership Report version 2 Leave a Group version 2 or Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to e
269. eane a AA AA E 503 Miror Modeen a E a 504 6 15 Contiguratioh COMMANG osrin osanaan a aaa Eaa a To aa aa aaa aaa E 505 CONIJULAION OAV aaa dl el a cell ll amie 505 Holmes eo anasi a a a e aa e anae aa a eaae io eaaa io aeaa EANA 505 6 16 Firmware Commands a 506 FIMWaTe LO A A EA a AAA rere rr 506 FINAWare IPod A A 506 FlimWare INIOR MAG ii oi 506 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Firmar OWAD a a a o o a o a ed a 506 621 7 UP MR COminalnG acanna ecmncenaceccuedeewcnives aumsueetensietaoceeeewctin este 508 UPAR CONIgJ rAUOM sa IS A oss ee area eae 508 AIT MOUE ainia dc 508 DEN TT ota 509 WEAP AGVEISING DUI a AS A AA Ai 509 DAS WAV COM IMA ING creiren a a ae E 510 MVE Oxo ah i e 02 140 g peme etre eptieae ences aa Oita ROM Met epee ec ee ea eee nr ee Acar ne eae 510 MYR A ae ee ee et ee ee 510 MYR VEAN S UO stitute Seasiciet a a e teases dbesseanale nade 511 MV Te IN MOGGS eoii aaneen aeniea aiaa tate se Aa aeei stata Maree sth tenn A AEEA 511 MVR LIN A A 512 MYR VEAN EL e De 512 MYR VEANCRa aana a le a 513 MUR VEAN PRIORY ascos al ol idilio 513 MYR Immediate Lee a O ee 513 MYR Stallone a 514 MA ee Re ere ee 514 Mn PP eee Rea ee este tee ete teen tes 514 6 19 VOICE VEAN COMMaNd issos oaee iaee ae Ea aeea aieeaa eaa aeiaai 516 VOICE VEAN Contigua Oia a A E 516 VOCE VANOS a ad 517 A O Cer ee ne een e nen eee Te 518 Voice EINER SIMed aldo actas 518 Vore VEAN Trate Classes ia 519 VOICE VEAN OU AGG A A A A A eg ace 51
270. eas cat sd nade E ned ans a see cota eed ae eee shed 368 ND ata geet estes ae gece nossa ged ete ten ae gecrceet eno eoracsoeue teed ecm seeaewenenesoemonnc geuttens ecm sea cecal madescatneeneanttans 368 MEAN ALAMOS cdas 369 MEAN INgress Flair A reas 370 VEAN MOdS as waa once as cere GS a Nanna eh tere eee dee ee iaa 370 NTE TYDE secre be Seca ea tee nat el en o ot ia tia 371 VLAN OIM A et er E Me eco er Rtn eC rte eho nr ere mn eed ore eer ee 371 VLAN EMS Pei A AAA A A AAA AA AA 372 VEAN Add unit A A A EE AE 372 MEAN ESTOS Adler oia aloe names eansarancten 373 MEAN De e ii do 373 VEAN Forbidden Delete rai AA AA EA E 374 MAIN FORDIOG en LOOKUP dt dd esses oe 374 VEAN TOOKU ab sep ri a eater cane Stk cmc ee oa tail 374 VEAN Nme Add test 375 VEAN Name Delle A AA AA AAA AAA 376 VEAN Name OO KU Di a ls ll tan 376 MEAN Sat aiii 377 6 6 Private VLAN Configuration Command ccccsseseseseeeeeeeeeeceennneeeseeeeeessneeeeeeseeoonssneeeeeseeeoonssneeeeeesees 378 PN SIN AGO MIURA IN facta beats a a ites dins o eeceuee dou 378 PAIN at at aencdevedaderasisnncetacientcabatanere Shee data nienent Satesaien teat Nene decade te ea Nanette tet E E 378 A A et acetate AN eGo k 5 ote i ek ott Se alanaicaies 379 PYEAN EO OK UND asii ld ate Poca 379 mag 0 io ol een no o ee ee ee ore 380 6 7 Security COMMAND AAA AAN ER ti AA 381 Security Switch User Configuration occccconcococonnnconoconoconcnnnnononnnnnnnnononcnnonnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnr
271. eaves and MLDv1 Dones respectively Received Buttons 177 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Retesh J Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears all Statistics counters i Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Auto refresh 4 8 16 MVR Groups Information Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR Group Table The MVR Groups Information screen in Figure 4 8 19 appears MVR Channels Groups Information Auto refresh L start from WLAN and Group Address CF with 2 entries per page Port Members a ms anios 2 315 Fe iie o mee ets a Mo more entres Figure 4 8 19 MVR Groups Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group ID of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Auto refresh ml Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields k Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR C
272. ect the Managed Switch to network devices Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10 100 1000 RJ 45 ports on the front of the Managed Switch Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer servers workstations or routers etc Connection to the Managed Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ 45 tips For more information please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A Step5 Supply power to the Managed Switch Connect one end of the power cable to the Managed Switch Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet When the Managed Switch receives power the Power LED should remain solid Green 2 2 2 Rack Mounting To install the Managed Switch in a 19 inch standard rack please follows the instructions described below Step1 Place the Managed Switch on a hard flat surface with the front panel positioned towards the front side Step2 Attach the rack mount bracket to each side of the Managed Switch with supplied screws attached to the package Figure 2 8 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Managed Switch 34 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Figure 2 8 Attach brackets to the Managed Switch You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty Step3 Secure the brackets tightly Step4 Follow the same steps to attach the second b
273. ect to the network Solution 1 Check the LNK ACT LED on the switch 2 Try another port on the Switch 3 Make sure the cable is installed properly 4 Make sure the cable is the right type 5 Turn off the power After a while turn on power again MM 100Base TX port link LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting Mi Switch does not power up Solution 1 AC power cord not inserted or faulty 2 Check that the AC power cord is inserted correctly 3 Replace the power cord lf the cord is inserted correctly check that the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch 554 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 If that device works refer to the next step 5 If that device does not work check the AC power NW while IP Address be changed or forgotten admin password To reset the IP address to the default IP Address 192 168 0 100 or reset the password to default value Press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device is rebooted you can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx SY PLANET wasw 24040 Networking 4 Communication Console o 30 115200 8 1 1000 C 10 100 Reset 555 U
274. ecting DC Power Supply WGSW 24040kR ooococoocccccnoconoconcnnonononnonononononcnnonnncnnonnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnarinns 38 ISS WITGA MANAGEMEN iaa an 39 3 REQUIEM San a a a 39 3 2 Management ACCESS OVEFVIEW isa 40 3 0 MCIMIMISIFAlION CON li a a a 40 3 4 Web Manage MEN E 42 3 5 SNMP Based Network Manageme nt scscccccssssseeeseeessseeeeeoeseeeneoesseeeeeeosseeeseooesseeeseonenseeeseoenseessonenss 43 4 WEB CONFIGURATION sedeve seve sevessceus sica were venuveconaccusteveseveieeueboiaveuieis deus Vole Ea 44 A AMA Web Page conde 47 A2 DY SUC sceserseictece tithes sbi cee cece s 49 42 Te SY SlOM MOnato es ecu se lobe panacea teats L E cena tae A E a lar aeeseeerenaarases 50 A O A e 51 AZ 3 APVO ON UA A A A 52 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R ELA SESGO UTA MIN tado de a a o o a ae a eae 53 ALO TIVOS Leve Sana 55 A2 ONTE EOI o dll o ld o ll de 57 A A A a e E oo E E IE SIEEN NEE ee Ea enn te eer 58 428 DH Rea a a o o 60 4 23 DAGPIR Clay SlalSties tii dl cia lc it 62 AS aa Bi o 2 6 A e e 63 ES Log a 64 ALZA NEO A A e a aio 65 AZ AS REMO SY SIO a ea here ce ee 66 A A eel 67 4 2 15 Web Firmware paradise drid dada lada 69 ALO ME LA cal AN 618 2 0 lemme losa 70 42 17 C onigurationm BackUp riinan A dean ceases 70 t2 AG GON igual MAY PIO AG rr oo caos 72 AZ 19 image SCC Euan ents ccseasea essa adie Seeder An 74 ALO PACO Dai o a a eee a eee 75 4221 SYSICM Rebolo a a a eee See 76 4 3 S
275. ed disabled disabled 7 30Ten disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled Figure 4 9 5 QoS Egress Port Shapers page screenshot Port disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled Port disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disable disable disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 5 1 e Q0 Q7 Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Port Shows disabled or actual port shaper rate e g 800 Mbps 4 9 5 1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers The Port Scheduler and Shapers for a specific port are configured on this page The QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shaper sscreen in Figure 4 9 6 appears 186 enable rate unit Excess A joo repo oo es joo repo joo s joo repo joo ess joo re
276. ed Switch includes the user access and management control The Security page contains links to the following main topics a Port Limit Control Access Management HTTPs SSH DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard ARP Inspection 4 12 1 Port Limit Control This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID If Limit Control is enabled on a port the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port If this number is exceeded an action is taken The action can be one of the four different actions as described below The Limit Control module utilizes a lower layer module Port Security module which manages MAC addresses learnt on the port The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Port Limit Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 1 appears 264 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Port Security Limit Control Configuration System Configuration Aging Enabled Aging Period Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 4 12 1 Port Limit Control Configuration Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields System Configuration Object Description e Mode Indicates if Limit Control is
277. ed between the RADIUS Accounting Server and the switch TACACS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each TACACS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are Object o e Enabled IP Address Hostname e Port e Secret Buttons Save Click to save changes Description The TACACS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies Enable the TACACS Authentication Server by checking this box The IP address or hostname of the TACACS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation The TCP port to use on the TACACS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 49 is used on the TACACS Authentication Server The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the TACACS Authentication Server and the switch Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 247 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 11 7 RADIUS Overview This page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the Authentication configuration page The RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 8 appears RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview e iP adres 0 0 0 0 1512 Disabled 0 0 0 0 18512 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1012 Disabled RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overview
278. ed through local management gt e If sFlow is currently configured through SNMP Owner contains a string identifying the sFlow receiver 317 e IP Address Hostname e Timeout e TxSuccesses e Tx Errors e Flow Samples e Counter Samples Port Statistics Object e Port e Rxand Tx Flow Samples e Counter Samples Buttons User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The IP address or hostname of the sFlow receiver The number of seconds remaining before sampling stops and the current sFlow owner is released The number of UDP datagrams successfully sent to the sFlow receiver The number of UDP datagrams that has failed transmission The most common source of errors is invalid sFlow receiver IP hostname configuration To diagnose paste the receiver s IP address hostname into the Ping Web page Diagnostics Ping Ping6 The total number of flow samples sent to the sFlow receiver The total number of counter samples sent to the sFlow receiver Description The port number for which the following statistics applies The number of flow samples sent to the sFlow receiver originating from this port Here flow samples are divided into Rx and Tx flow samples where Rx flow samples contains the number of packets that were sampled upon reception ingress on the port and Tx flow samples contains the number of packets that were sampled upon transmission egress on the port The total number of counter samples sen
279. ed user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account Add New User Click to add a new user Add Edit User This page configures a user add edit or delete user Add User User Settings assword Password again Privilege Level w Se Figure 4 2 5 Add Edit User Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Username e Password e Privilege Level Description A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores The password of the user The allowed string length is 0 to 32 The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s 94 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the
280. eeeeecceeececceuseecseeseessuueeeseeeessegeeessseeesseeeesseneeeeas 399 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry TIMES ccccccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeseseesaeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeas 399 Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID coooccnccocnncccoccncccncnnononcnnonononnnnncnnnnonnnnonnnonononcnnnnancnnos 400 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID cccococcocococonoconconoconnnnonononononcnnnonncnnonononononronononcnnonanenoss 400 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name ccccccssececcesececeeeeecceeeecceuseecseseeseaeeeseeeessegeeessaesesseueeessegeeenes 401 Security Switch SNMP Engine ID ccccccccssseecceeeeecceescecceueeecseueeeceececseuscessueeesseeeesseeessegeeesseeeesegesenseneeenas 401 Security Switch SNMP Community Add ii a eal Oe aha oe 401 Security Switch SNMP Community Delete ooocccccoccocccononcococonoconconocononnonononononcnnononcnnononnnnnnnrnnononnanenananess 402 Security Switch SNMP Community LOOKUP occccoocconcccnconoconcnnonoconononcononononnonononononrnnnnnnrnnononnnnnnnranonanrnrenananess 402 Security Switch SNMP User Add cccccssecccssseeeceeseeeceescecsesececsageeeseseeeseaeeecsageeessugeesseeeessgeeessuueesseaseessegenesss 403 Security Switch NM User Delete ii tl al A 404 Security Switch SNMP User Changekey cccoooccccoccconoconconocononconononononconononnnnonnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnonannnnnnnrnnen
281. eeessegeeesseeeessgeeessegeeesas 411 Security Switch RMON History Delete ooocccooococccoccococoncncococonononconoconcnnononononnnrnnononcnnonannnnnnnrnnoroncnnonananess 411 Security Switch RMON Hist ry LOOKUP cool aada is 412 Security Switch RIMONAlarmAdd tasas iait 412 Security Switch RMON Alarm Delete occcoccnccccccccccccoccnccocnconcnononcnnnncnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnaninnnnns 413 Security Switch RMON Alarm Lookup 0 e o o dde ob ea na E 413 Security Switch RMON Event Add meneren aa AA e dad 414 Security Switch RMON Event Delete sai o ld ido lO 414 Security Switch RMON Event Lookup ccoccccoccnccccnccoccnconcncnocnnononononcnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 414 Secuiity NelWork Seco Wicca tel dt e NO 415 Security Network PSCC PO liceos 415 Security Network Limit Configuration cccococnncococonoconcnnoconnnnonononononcnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnonnnnnonrnnenonrnnenananess 416 Security Network Limit MoOde oocococcccoccnccccnccocnnccncncnncnnonnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnaness 416 Security Network LIMmItAGING e cee ee A e dc e O e tle O 417 Security Network Limit AGetiMme ia 418 SECUNILY NGIWORK LIE PO beset e595 3 uate cach tats iia dios 418 Security Network Limit Limit cc ceccccsseeecceseeeceesceeceececceeeecseueeeceuseeseseesseueeessaeeesseeeessegeeessgeeessuesesseneeesaas 419 Secur
282. elected port it tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress Untag outgoing frames without VLAN Tagged Tagged outgoing frames with VLAN Tagged e Q in Q Mode Sets the Managed Switch to QinQ mode and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be configured The default is for the Managed Switch to function in Disable mode Disable The port operates in its normal VLAN mode This is the default MAN Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for an uplink port to another device within the service provider network Customer Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for a client access port to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network Set Out layer VLAN tag The Tag Protocol Identifier TPID specifies the ethertype of incoming packets on ether type a tunnel access port 802 1Q Tag 8100 VMAN Tag 88A8 Default 802 1Q Tag The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 6 5 VLAN Membership Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index The VLAN membership configuration for the selected stack switch unit switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 255 VLANs are supported This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as w
283. ell as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN The VLAN Membership screen in 114 Figure 4 6 3 appears User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R VLAN Membership Configuration start fram LAN with 2 entries per page Port Members A petete wanio vrannome a 2 3 4 6 binene Add Mew VLAN Figure 4 6 3 VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Delete e VLAN ID e VLAN Name e Port Members e Adding a New VLAN Buttons Description To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted on all stack switch units during the next Save Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN Indicates the name of the VLAN Maximum length of the VLAN Name String is 32 VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet VLAN name can be edited for the existing VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box as Pal To include a port in a forbidden port list check the box as shown e To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked as shown L_ By default no ports are members and for every new VLAN entry all boxes are unchecked Click Add New VLAN to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Lega
284. ely Gear Clears the counters for the selected server The Pending Requests counter will not be cleared by this operation 4 11 9 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration Setup the RADIUS server and assign the client IP address to the Managed switch In this case field in the default IP Address of the Managed Switch with 192 168 0 100 And also make sure the shared secret key is as same as the one you had set at the Managed Switch s 802 1x system configuration 12345678 at this case 1 Configure the IP Address of remote RADIUS server and secret key Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration seconds RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration lemas asressPiotone ve e Figure 4 11 10 RADIUS Server Configuration screenshot 2 Add New RADIUS Cleint on the Windows 2003 server 256 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R P Internet Authentication Service paj xj File Action wiew Help gt paa Internet Authentication Service Local i Remote Acce New RADIUS Client E Remote Acce NA H E Connection R View Friendly Mame Address Protocol CATest 192 166 0 5 RADIUS Refresh Export List Help Mew Cet Figure 4 11 11 Windows Server add new RADIUS client setting Assign the client IP address to the Managed switch New RADIUS Client xl Mame and Address Type a frendly name and ether an IP Address or ONS name for t
285. em is also provided to enhance the reliability with either 100 240V AC power supply unit or DC 48V power supply unit The continuous power systems are specifically designed to handle the demands of high tech facilities requiring the highest power integrity available 1 3 How to Use This Manual This User Manual is structured as follows Section 2 INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch Section 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the software function of the Managed Switch Section 4 WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Web interface Section 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The section describes how to use the Command Line interface CLI Section 6 CLI CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Command Line interface Section 7 SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to does the switch operation of the Managed Switch Section 8 TROUBSHOOTING The chapter explains how to trouble shooting of the Managed Switch Appendix A The section contains cable information of the Managed Switch 23 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 1 4 Product Features gt Physical Port m 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 copper E 4100 1000Base X mini GBIC SFP slots shared with Port 21 to Port 24 mM RS 232 DB9 console interface for basic management and setup gt Layer 2 Features E Preve
286. ent entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 205 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 10 Access Control Lists ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application 4 10 1 Access Control List Status This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined I
287. entication is enabled and the port is in a 802 1X based mode this is not so Criticial since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X 229 e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled e Guest VLAN Enabled e Guest VLAN ID User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MAC Based Auth If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration Security AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the The switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the tr
288. entication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the 224 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client a Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an
289. entry e Sample Index Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry e Sample Start The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Drops The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network e Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received e Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address e Multicast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address e CRCErrors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets e Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets e Oversize The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets 327 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Fragments The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Jabber The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment e Utilization The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interf
290. eny any new MLD join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 13 appears MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Figure 4 8 13 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e Filtering Group The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered e Add New Filtering Click Add New Filtering Group to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Group Specify the Port and Filtering Group of the new entry Click Save Buttons Add new Filtering Group Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Save Click to save changes _Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 170 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 8 11 MLD Snooping Status This page provides MLD Snooping status The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4 8 14 appears Auto refresh LJ MLD Snooping Status Statistics LAN Querier Host Querier Queries Queries Y1 Reports 2 Reports Y1 Leaves ID ersion Yersion Status Transmitted Received Received Received Received Router Port Figure 4 8 14 MLD Sno
291. er Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link 232 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once successfully authenticated Multi 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X n
292. er Access Control System Plus It is a networking protocol which provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another It is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses th
293. er a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation Description Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE Any No ICMP filter is specified ICMP filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP value A field for entering an ICMP value appears When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter you can enter a specific ICMP value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this 215 e ICMP Code Filter e ICMP Code Value m TCP UDP Parameters Object e TCP UDP Source Filter e TCP UDP Source No e TCP UDP Source Range e TCP UDP Destination Filter e TCP UDP Destination Number User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R ICMP value Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears When Specific is selected for the ICMP code filter you can enter a specific ICMP code value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value Description Specify the TCP UDP source filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP source filter is specified TCP UDP source filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source fil
294. er of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 to 127 octets in length e 128 255 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 to 255 octets in length e 256 511 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 to 511 octets in length e 512 1023 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 to 1023 octets in length e 1024 1588 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 to 1588 octets in length Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 18 12 RMON Statistics Status This page provides an overview of RMON Statistics entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Statistics table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Statistics table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Statistics table screen in Figure 4 18 12 appears RMON Statistics Status Overview Auto refresh L start from Control Index o with 2o entries per page Sel Octets Pkts ios ae aes Frag Jabb Coll B Ta ee a ae tee ee ifindex y 127 255 511 1023 1588 Mo more entres Figure 4 18 12 RMON Statistics Statu
295. erver mode default Show system Log server mode Default Setting disable Example To show the log server mode 341 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt System log server mode System Log Server Mode Disabled System Name Description Set or show the system name Syntax System Name lt name gt Parameters lt name gt System name string 1 255 Use to clear the string System name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character and the first or last character must not be a minus sign Example To set device title WGSW 24040 gt System name WGSW 24040 LAB System Contact Description Set or show the system contact Syntax System Contact lt contact gt Parameters lt contact gt System contact string 1 255 Use to clear the string In CLI No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact Default Setting empty 342 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example To set device contact WGSW 24040 gt System contact WGSW 24040 Test System Log Server Address Description Show or set the system log server address Syntax System Log Server Address lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Defaul
296. es again 69 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 2 16 TFTP Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade page provides the functions to allow a user to update the Managed Switch firmware from the TFTP server in the network Before updating make sure you have your TFTP server ready and the firmware image is on the TFTP server The TFTP Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 20 appears TFTP Firmware Upgrade TFTP Server IP 1 Firmware File Hame Figure 4 2 20 TF TP Firmware Update page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e TFTP Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address e Firmware File Name The name of firmware image Maximum length 24 characters Buttons Click to upgrade firmware DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch until the update progress is complete Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without press the OK button after the image be loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again 4 2 17 Configuration Backup This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The Configuration Backup screen in Figure 4 2 21 appears 70 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Configuration Save save confiaron save condlewraton except IP Address Figure 4 2 21 Configuration Save page screenshot You can save view or load the
297. escription e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch ID 1 for example if the port is switch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 1800 seconds e Buckets Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 50 e Buckets Granted The number of data shall be saved in the RMON Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 18 8 RMON History Detail This page provides an detail of RMON history entries screen in Figure 4 18 8 appears 326 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Detalled RMON History ID Auto refresh d SampleStart Drops Octets Pkts Broadcast Multicast CRC Alignment Undersize Oversize Fragments Jabber Collisions Utilization 0 0 0 Ll 0 Ll 0 Ll 0 Ll 0 Ll 0 Figure 4 18 8 RMON history Detail page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e History Index Indicates the index of History control
298. est VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled 230 e Max Reauth Count e Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen Port Configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Valid values are in the range 1 4095 The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only
299. estart the stack switch on this page After restart the stack switch will boot normally 49 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 2 1 System Information The System Info page provides information for the current device information System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system uptime The screen in Figure 4 2 1 appears System Information Contact Name AGS ADAN A Location Hardware Hardware Version version 2 MAC Address DO 30 4f 55 66 44 Power Status UC Power Temperature 56 0 E 132 0 F 1970 01 01 Thu 00 04 44 00 00 Ud 00 07 24 Software Version Betal 00511331 Software Date 2012 08 31113 31 59 05800 Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 2 1 System Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Contact The system contact configured in Configuration System Information System Contact e Name The system name configured in Configuration System Information System Name e Location The system location configured in Configuration System Information System Location e MAC Address The MAC Address of this switch e Power Status Indicate AC DC power supply input of this switch e Temperature Indicate main chipset temperature e System Date The current GMT system time and date The system time is obtained through the configured SNTP Server if any e System Uptime The period of time the d
300. etail screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses ID are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed e State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic e Time of Adding Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port e Age Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 274 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of DUT whe
301. etween check for activity on learned MAC addresses Syntax Security Network Limit Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt Time in seconds between checks for activity on a MAC address 10 10000000 seconds default Show current age time Default Setting 3600 Example Set age time in 100sec WGSW 24040 gt security network limit agetime 100 Security Network Limit Port Description Set or show per port enabledness Syntax Security Network Limit Port lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port security on this port disable Disable port security on this port default Show current port enabledness of port security limit control Default Setting disable Example Enable port limit for port 1 WGSW 24040 gt security network limit port 1 enable 418 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Network Limit Limit Description Set or show the max number of MAC addresses that can be learned on this set of ports Syntax Security Network Limit Limit lt port_list gt lt limit gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt limit gt Max number of MAC addresses on this port default Show current limit Default Setting 4 Example Set limit in 5 WGSW 24040 gt security network limit limit 1 10 5 Security Network Limit Action Descri
302. etwork device to a non compliant network device Frame Income Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Frame remain untagged Table 4 6 1 Ingress Egress port with VLAN VID Tag Untag table E IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Q in Q IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks 111 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 Customer As LAN Q in O VLAN Tunnel Customer As LAN Headquarter Branch Office WGSW
303. evice has been operational e Software Version The software version of the switch e Software Date The date when the switch software was produced 90 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone 4 2 2 IP Configuration The IP Configuration includes the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration Fill up the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device The screen in Figure 4 2 2 appears IP Configuration configured current DHCP Client IP Address 192 168 0100 192 168 0 100 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 192 165 0 1 Figure 4 2 2 IP Configuration page screenshot The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Object Description e DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup e IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation e IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation e IP Router Prov
304. eviously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retesh Click to refresh the page immediately 135 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 7 Spanning Tree Protocol 4 7 1 Theory The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions E STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D a RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w E MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 15 The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of
305. ew entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 view entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp view lookup Idx View Name View Type OID Subtree default view included 2 snmpv3_viwe included Number of entries 2 Security Switch SNMP Access Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 access entry The entry index key are lt group_name gt lt security_model gt and lt security_level gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Add lt group_name gt lt security_model gt lt security_level gt lt read_view_name gt lt write_view_name gt 408 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters lt group_name gt A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt security_model gt any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM lt security level gt noAuthNoPriv None authentication and none privacy AuthNoPriv Authentication and none privacy AuthPriv Authentication and privacy lt read_view_name gt The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content i
306. figura sos5 2c5 has fedeccdeis a aa eae cereale abe Ses ee ek 392 security SWC SNMP MOQ ucca cantos iia ilatina oia dde 392 Security Switch SNMP Version ccccccccccssececceeeecccececceuscecceueeessuueecsaeeeeseueeessegeeesseeeesaueeessegeeesseeeessgesessegeeeeas 393 Security Switch SNMP Read Community cccccsccccsseeeccseeeceeseeeceseecceseecsegeeeseaseeeseaeeessegeeessaseeeseuseesseseeenes 394 Security Switch SNMP Write Community cccccccececcsececceeeeeceesecceeececseaececseeeessseeeseeeessegeeesseeesseueeesseneessas 394 Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode o al id dl 395 Security Switch SNMP Trap Versi0ON ccooocccccocccnccoccnnonoccnccnncnnononcnnononrnnonnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnrnnrnrnnnnnnenannnns 395 Security Switch NME Trap COMMU IL cess ace ee eal re eh told aaa ed ne 396 Security Switch SNMP Trap DeStination ccssar an ad did aca ais 396 Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination ooocccccocccnccoccnconoccncnnncnnnnnncnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnncnns 397 Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure oooccccocccncconnnnononcnccnnnnnonnncnnnonnnnnonnrnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 397 Security Switch SNMP Irap LINE o O Net eh eae dhs oe 398 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode cccceececcssececceeeecccnseccauscecceececsegeeessseecseeeessegseesseeeessuseessageeenas 398 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout ccccccseeeecceseeec
307. figuration Syntax STP Msti Map lt msti gt clear Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 Clear Clear VID to MSTI mapping STP MSTI Add Description Add a VLAN single or range to a MSTI Syntax STP Msti Add lt msti gt lt vid range gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt vid range gt Single VLAN ID 1 4095 or xx yy VLAN ID range 456 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Add MST1 in vlan1 WGSW 24040 gt stp msti add 1 1 STP Port Configuration Description Show STP Port configuration Syntax STP Port Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations Example Show STP status of Port1 WGSW 24040 gt stp port configuration 1 Port Mode AdminEdge AutoEdge restrRole restrTcn Point2point Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Auto STP Port Mode Description Set or show the STP enabling for a port Syntax STP Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations Enable Enable MSTP protocol Disable Disable MSTP protocol Default 457 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R disable Example Enable STP function on port WGSW 24040 gt stp port mode 1 enable STP Port Edge Description
308. flag setting for this ACE No IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry Yes IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the source IP filter for this ACE Any No source IP filter is specified Source IP filter is don t care Host Source IP filter is set to Host Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Source IP filter is set to Network Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE Any No destination IP filter is specified Destination IP filter is don t care Host Destination IP filter is set to Host Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that appears Network Destination IP filter is set to Network Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can ent
309. following fields Object e Port to mirror on e Port e Mode Description Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored to this port Disabled disables mirroring The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received at this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only Frames transmitted from this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted or frames received are mirrored Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored to the mirror port 95 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port Because of this mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 96 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 5 Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duple
310. g Mode cccccececcseececceeeeeceeeeecauececceueeecseeeeceueeeeseuecessegeeesseeeesauseesseneeesss 437 Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode oocccccoccocococcocococoncconconocononnononononnnconononcnnononnnnnnnranononcnnonaneness 438 Security Network DHCP Snooping StatisStiCS ooococcconnncococonoconconocononconanonononcnnnnoncnnononnnnnnnrnnononcnnonananess 439 Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration ooccccooncncccoccncnoncnnononononnncnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 439 Security Network IP Source Guard MOG cccccssececceeececceeeeeceeeeeccaucecceseecseuseeseuseeeseeeessegeeesseeesssgeeesseneeesas 440 Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode oocccccoccococoncncococonoconconoconcnnononononnncnnnnoncnnononnnnnnnrnnononcnnonananess 440 Security Network IP Source Guard Emit sescee ia 441 Security Network IP Source Guard Entry coooccncccccnccccccnccnocononononnononononnncnnonnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnns 441 Security Network IP Source Guard Status ooncccococoncccnconocononconononononcnnononnnnononononnnrnnononcnnononnnnnnnrannrancnnenananess 442 Security Network IP Source Guard Translation coooncococonnncoconnnoconcnnoconnnconanonononcnnononcnnononnnnnnnrononancnnonanenes 442 Security Network ARP Inspection ConfiguratiON oooccccconccncconcnnonoccncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnonnrrnrnnn
311. g gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt file_name gt Firmware file name Firmware IPv6 Load Description Load new firmware from IPv6 TFTP server Syntax Firmware IPv6 Load lt ipv6_server gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ipv6_server gt TFTP server IPv6 address lt file_name gt Firmware file name Firmware Information Description Display information about active and alternate firmware images Syntax Firmware Information Firmware Swap Description 906 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Activate the alternate firmware image Syntax Firmware Swap 907 6 17 UPnP Command UPnP Configuration Description Show UPnP configuration Syntax UPnP Configuration Example Show UPnP configuration WGSW 24040 gt upnp configuration UPnP Configuration UPnP Mode Disabled UPnP TTL 74 UPnP Advertising Duration 100 UPnP Mode Description Set or show the UPnP mode Syntax UPnP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable UPnP disable Disable UPnP default Show UPnP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the UPnP mode 908 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt upnp mode enable UPnP TTL Description Set or show the TTL value of the IP header in SSDP messages Syntax UPnP TTL lt ttl gt Parameters lt ttl gt ttl range
312. gistered IPMCv6 Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding Flooding enabled The flooding control takes effect only wnen MLD Snooping is enabled When MLD Snooping is disabled unregistered IPMCv 6 traffic flooding is always active in spite of this setting e MLD SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range 167 e Leave Proxy Enable e Proxy Enable e Router Port e Fast Leave e Throtting Buttons Save Click to save changes User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Enable MLD Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side Enable MLD Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port The allowed selection is Auto Fix Fone default compatibility value is Auto Enable the fast leave on the port Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 9 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLA
313. globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but 265 e Aging Enabled e Aging Period Port Configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames
314. gmp lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters mid igmp mid IPMC for IPv6 MLD 931 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MLD fast leave disable Disable MLD fast leave default Show IPMC fast leave mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP fast leave for all port WGSW 24040 gt ipmc fastleave igmp 1 10 enable IPMC Throttling Description Set or show the IPMC port throttling status Syntax IPMC Throttling mid igmp lt port_list gt limit_group_number Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 0 No limit 1 10 Group learn limit default Show IPMC Port Throttling Default Setting Unlimited Example Set the max learn 10 groups for ICMP port throttling WGSW 24040 gt ipmc throttling igmp 1 10 10 932 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R IPMC Filtering Description Set or show the IPMC port group filtering list Syntax IPMC Filtering mld igmp lt port_list gt add del group_adadr Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port group filtering entry del Del existing port group filtering entry default Show IPMC port group filtering list group_a
315. gth is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible authentication protocol are None None authentication protocol MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication 83 e Authentication Password e Privacy Protocol e Privacy Password Buttons User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R protocol SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For MD5 authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are None None privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user usi
316. gy provides the mechanism to detect and report potential cabling issues Reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default PLANET Smart Discovery Utility for deploy management gt Redundant Power System WGSW 24040R Only MM 100 240V AC 48V DC Dual power redundant Active active redundant power failure protection Backup of catastrophic power failure on one supply Fault tolerance and resilience 26 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 1 5 Product Specification Pa OO OOO usono osnan O O O O OOOO Hardware Specification 4 100 1000Base X SFP interfaces shared with Port 21 to Port 24 SFP mini GBIC Slots Compatible with 100Base FX SFP ET ce IEEE 802 3x Pause Frame for Full Duplex Flow Control Back pressure for Half Duplex Jumbo Frame 9Kbytes lt 5 sec System reboot Reset Button gt 5 sec Factory Default Dimension W x D x H 440 x 200 x 44 5 mm 1U high 27409 Power LED 1000 Link Act and 10 100 Link Act for per Gigabit port 1000 Speed and Link Act for per fiber port 100 240V AC 50 60Hz 48V DC 0 6A Range 36 60V WGSW 24040R Only Power Consumption Max 21 0 watts 71 652BTU ESD Protection 6KV DC Layer 2 Function Basic Management Interfaces Console Telnet Web Browser SNMP v1 v2c Secure Management Interfaces SSH SSL SNMP v3 Port disable enable Power Requirement Port Configuration Auto Negotiation 10 100 1000Mbps full and half du
317. h of the page at regular intervals 4 4 4 SFP Information You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information page This page shows the operational status such as the transceiver type speed and wavelength and supports distance of SFP module on a specific interface You can also use the hyperlink of port no to check the statistics on a speficic interface The SFP Module Information screen in Figure 4 4 4 appears SFP Module Information port Type Speed Wave Length nm Distance m port Auto refresh Ll Figure 4 4 4 SFP Module Information for Switch page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Type Display the type of current SFP module the possible types are NW 1000Base SX NW 1000Base LX NW 100Base FX e Speed Display the spedd of current SFP module the speed value or description is get from the SFP module Different vendors SFP modules might shows different speed information e Wave Length nm Display the wavelength of current SFP module the wavelength value is get from the SFP module Use this column to check if the wavelength values of two nodes are the matched while the fiber connection is failed e Distance m Display the supports distance of current SFP module the distance value is get from the SFP module 93 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an auto
318. hannels Groups Information Table 178 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 8 17 MVR SFM Information Entries in the MVR SFM Information Table are shown on this page The MVR SFM Source Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR SFM Information Table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR SFM Information Table The Start from VLAN and Group Address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR SFM Information Table The MVR SFM Information screen in Figure 4 8 20 appears NVR SFM Information Auto refresh LJ Star tom VLAN Jan Group Address Jas ers per page VLAN ID Group Port Mode Source Address Hardware Filter Switch No more entres Figure 4 8 20 MVR SFM Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port nu
319. he CIST Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 9 appears STP CIST Port Configuration CIST Aggregated Port Configuration STP a Restricted Port Enabled Path Cost Priority Admin Edge Auto Edge Role TON BPDU Guard LJ Point to point O avo mp ew O0 E CIST Normal Port Configuration STP a l Restricted Point to Port Enabled Path Cost Admin Edge Auto Edge BPDU Guard anne L d d d d d d d d d i 4 4 EL FERRE El El El 4 5 4 4 a8 8 AAA Beek ff fije fe S lt lt noooeococools d LI LI LI LI LI LI LI 145 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Figure 4 7 9 STP CIST Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port e STP Enabled e Path Cost e Priority e AdminEdge e AutoEdge Restricted Role e Restricted TCN e BPDU Guard Description The switch port number of the logical STP port Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Controls the port priority This
320. he ELIN Service identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 295 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 Control Signaling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VolP policies
321. he LLDP neighbours table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbour devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch Note When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but gets removed when the hold time is exceeded Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 291 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 14 3 LLDP MED Configuration This page allows you to configure the LLDP MED The LLDPMED Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 2 appears LLDP MED Configuration Fast Start Repeat Count Coordinates Location Civic Address Location a suffi Street suffix House mo no cn O a Additional location info location info O O ee A Emergency Call Service Policies Policy ID Application Type VLAN ID L2 Priority DSCP Mo entries present
322. he Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows State Disabled Down Link RJ 45 Ports E L J SFP SFP Ports E Oo id Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can setup the Managed Switch by select the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 1 5 appears 47 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R System t SNMP t Fort Management Link Aggregation k VLONS Spanning Tree t Multicast t QOS Authentication t Security p Mac Address Table LLDF t Diagnostics t Loop Protection e SFL RMON HELP Figure 4 1 5 Managed Switch Main Functions Menu 48 4 2 System User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items System Information IP Configuration IPv6 Configuration Users Configuration Privilege Levels NTP Configuration UPnP DHCP Relay DHCP Relay Statistics CPU Load System Log
323. he Switch have built in Auto negotiation This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detect the modes and speeds at the second of both device is connected and capable of both 10Base T and 100Base TX devices can connect with the port in either Half or Full Duplex mode If attached device is 100Base TX port will set to 10Mbps with auto negotiation 10 20Mbps 10Base T Full Duplex 100Mbps no auto negotiation 100Mbps 100Mbps with auto negotiation 100 200Mbps 100Base TX Full Duplex 993 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 8 TROUBLE SHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve problems If the Ethernet Switch is not functioning properly make sure the Ethernet Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual MW The Link LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Ethernet Switch Mi Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution Please check the VLAN settings trunk settings or port enabled disabled status MM Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the Ethernet Switch If the Ethernet Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Please also check the in out rate of the port MW Why the Switch doesn t conn
324. he client Friendly name 802 1 Managed Switch Client address IP or ONS f 92 168 0 100 Meri Back Lancel Figure 4 11 12 Windows Server RADIUS Server setting 257 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 The shared secret key should be as same as the key configured on the Managed Switch New RADIUS Client RADIUS Standard E Figure 4 11 13 Windows Server RADIUS Server setting 5 Configure ports attribute of 802 1X the same as 802 1X Port Configuration RADIUS Assigned RADIUS Assigned Guest Portbased 802 1X O Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Reinitialize 2 Porthesed 802 1 vw Globally Disabled Reanthenticate Reinitialize Figure 4 11 14 802 1x Port Configuration 6 Create user data The establishment of the user data needs to be created on the Radius Server PC For example the Radius Server founded on Win2003 Server and then 258 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R y f H A Security Shortcut ta Active Directory Domains and Trusts Configurati Network Active Directory Sites and Services 0 Active Directory Users and Computers Certification Authority Administrator Cluster Administrator Manage Your Server EN Command Prompt Component Services Computer Management ig Control 4 Configure Your Server Wizard aj Data Sources ODBC rm 48 Adminis a Distributed File System
325. he input fields k Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 8 7 IGMPv3 Information Entries in the IGMP SSM Information Table are shown on this page The IGMP SSM Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Diffrent source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP SSM Information Table The Start from VLAN and Group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP SSM Information Table The IGMPv3 Information screen in Figure 4 8 10 appears 165 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R IGMP SFM Information Auto refresh L start fram WLAN and Group with entries per page VLAN 1D Groun Port Mode Source address Type Hardware Fiter Switch Mo more entries OOO bo more entries Figure 4 8 10 IGMP SSM Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained pe
326. he number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Lt Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Clear Click to clear the information immediately 154 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 8 Multicast 4 8 1 IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have
327. he same row Shows the VLAN identifier for that port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 Show the VLAN Awareness for the port If VLAN awareness is enabled the tag is removed from tagged frames received on the port VLAN tagged frames are classified to the VLAN ID in the tag If VLAN awareness is disabled all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed Show the ingress filtering for a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVID determines the packet s behavior at the egress side 118 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or Not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur Functional Conflicts between feature Conflicts due to hardware limitation Direct conflict between user modules Buttons Static Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page aut
328. he secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server UDP port Use 0 to use the default RADIUS port 1812 447 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Set RADIUS authentication server configuration WGSW 24040 gt security aaa radius 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 1812 Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS Description Set or show RADIUS accounting server setup Syntax Security AAA ACCT RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show RADIUS accounting server configuration enable Enable RADIUS accounting server disable Disable RADIUS accounting server default Show RADIUS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external accounting server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server UDP port Use O to use the default RADIUS port 1813 Example Set RADIUS accounting server configuration WGSW 24040 gt security acct_radius 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 1813 Security AAA TACACS Description Set or show TACACS authentication server setup Syntax Security AAA TACACS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt 448 User s Man
329. hed network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states a Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state _ Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets Forwarding the port is forwarding packets Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one st
330. his manual that is incorrect misleading or incomplete we would appreciate your comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at whose own expense CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Energy Saving Note of the Device This power required device does not support Standby mode operation For energy saving please remove the power cable to disconnect the device from the power circuit Without removing power cable the device will still consuming power from the power source In the view of Saving the Energy and reduce the unnecessary power consuming it is strongly suggested to remove the power connection for the device if this device is not intended to be active WEEE Warning To a
331. his page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMPv 6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4 15 2 appears 306 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R ICMPv6 Ping e Address COOL e Length SE ee Ping Count o O Ping Interval Interval o Figure 4 15 2 ICMPv6 Ping page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e IP Address e Ping Length e Ping Count e Ping Interval Buttons Description The destination IP Address The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds Start Click to transmit ICMP packets New Ping Click to re start diagnostics with PING 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues on special port After you press Test 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The I
332. hough not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated 1 No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN tag unaware The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 104 VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID 1 This section has the following items VLAN Basic Information VLAN Port Configuration VLAN Memberships VLAN Membership Status VLAN Port Status Private VLAN Port Isolation MAC based VLAN MAC based VLAN Status IP based VLAN Protocol based VLAN Protocol based VLAN Displaies V
333. how the ACL port default action Syntax Security Network ACL Action lt port_list gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_redirect gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_copy gt Port number for copy of frames or disable lt logging gt System logging of frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable Example Show ACL action in port 1 WGSW 24040 gt security network acl action 1 Port Action Rate Limiter Permit Disabled Port Copy Mirror Logging Shutdown Counter Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 Security Network ACL Policy Description Set or show the ACL port policy Syntax Security Network ACL Policy lt port_list gt lt policy gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt policy gt Policy number 0 255 Default Setting 0 429 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Set ACL policy 2 for port 1 WGSW 24040 gt security network acl policy 1 2 Security Network ACL Rate Description Set or show the ACL rate limiter Syntax Security Network ACL Rate lt rate_limiter_list gt lt rate gt Parameters lt rate_limiter_list gt Rate limiter list 1 16
334. how the LACP key Syntax LACP Key lt port_list gt lt key gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt key gt LACP key 1 65535 or auto Default Setting auto Example Set key1 for port1 4 WGSW 24040 gt lacp key 1 4 1 LACP Priority Description Set or show the LACP prio Syntax LACP Prio lt port_list gt lt prio gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt prio gt LACP Prio 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 LACP System Priority Description Set or show the LACP System prio Syntax LACP System Prio lt sysprio gt Parameters lt sysprio gt LACP System Prio 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 LACP Role Description Set or show the LACP role Syntax LACP Role lt port_list gt active passive Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports active Initiate LACP negotiation passive Listen for LACP packets default Show LACP role Default Setting 469 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R active Example Set passive for port1 4 WGSW 24040 gt lacp role 1 4 passive LACP Status Description Show LACP Status Syntax LACP Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LACP status of port1 4 WGSW 24040 gt lacp status
335. ict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority strict Priority Figure 4 9 4 QoS Egress Port Schedule page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Mode e Q0 Q5 4 9 5 Port Shaping Description The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 5 1 Shows the scheduling mode for this port Shows the weight for this queue and port This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports The Port Shapping screen in Figure 4 9 5 appears 185 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Qos Egress Port Shapers 1 04 Pa disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled i disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabl
336. ide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation e VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 through 4095 e DNS Server Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled DUT will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server on DUT and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Renew Click to renew DHCP This button is only available if DHCP is enabled 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration The Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration The screen in Figure 4 2 3 appears Auto Configuration IPv6 Configuration ae Link Lacal Address fe80 230 4fff011 2255 The page includes the following fields Object e Auto Configuration e Address Figure 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration page screenshot Description Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv
337. ies on the switch port a DSCP remarking gt Multicast Supports IGMP Snooping v1 v2 and v3 Support MLD Snooping v1 and v2 Querier mode support IGMP Snooping port filtering MLD Snooping port filtering MVR Multicast VLAN Registration gt Security E IEEE 802 1x Port Based MAC Based network access authentication Build in RADIUS client to co operate with the RADIUS servers TACACS login users access authentication RADIUS TACACS users access authentication IP Based Access Control List ACL MAC Based Access Control List Source MAC IP address binding DHCP Snooping to filter untrusted DHCP messages Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks IP address access management to prevent unauthorized intruder gt Management E Switch Management Interfaces Console Telnet Command Line Interface Web switch management SNMP v1 v2c and v3 switch management SSH SSL secure access Four RMON groups history statistics alarms and events IPv6 IP Address NTP DNS management Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP client BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment Firmware upload download via HTTP TFTP DHCP Relay DHCP Option82 User Privilege levels control NTP Network Time Protocol 25 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Protocol Cable Diagnostic technolo
338. ikipedia WRED is an acronym for Weighted Random Early Detection It is an active queue management mechanism that provides preferential treatment of higher priority frames when traffic builds up within a queue A frame s DP level is used as input to WRED A higher DP level assigned to a frame results in a higher probability that the frame is dropped during times of congestion WTR is an acronym for Wait To Restore This is the time a fail on a resource has to be not active before restoration back to this previously failing resource is done 575 Y PLANET Networking amp Communication EC Declaration of Confommi For the following equipment Type of Product 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 Shared SFP Managed Gigabit Switch Model Number WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Produced by Manufacturer s Name Planet Technology Corp Manufacturer s Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C is herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the Council Directive on the Approximation of the Laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive on 2004 108 EC For the evaluation regarding the EMC the following standards were applied EN 55022 Class A 2006 A1 2007 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 55024 1998 Al 2001 A2 2003 IEC 61000 4 2 2008 IEC 61000 4 3 2006 A1 2008 A2
339. ill become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the
340. ilt in Web based management it offers an easy to use platform independent management and configuration facility The Managed Switch supports standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and can be managed via any standard based management software For text based management it can also be accessed via Telnet and the console port Powerful Security The Managed Switch offers comprehensive Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge Its protection mechanisms also comprise of port based 802 1x and MAC based user and device authentication The port security is effective in limit the numbers of clients pass through so that network administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with time and effort considerably less than before 22 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Flexibility and Extension solution The 4 mini GBIC slots are compatible with 1000Base SX LX and WDM SFP Small Factor Pluggable fiber optic modules The distance can be extended from 550 meters Multi Mode fiber up to above 10 20 30 40 50 70 120 kilometers Single Mode fiber or WDM fiber They are well suited for using within the enterprise data centers and distributions AC DC Power Redundant to ensure continuous operation The WGSW 24040R Managed Switch equip with one 100 240V AC power supply unit and one DC 48V power supply unit on its standard package it provides redundant power supply installation A redundant power syst
341. iltering Group Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping Status This page provides IGMP Snooping status The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4 8 8 appears Auto refresh L IGMP Snooping Status Statistics Figure 4 8 8 IGMP Snooping Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields 163 Object Buttons Retresh VLAN ID Querier Version Host Version Querier Status Querier Transmitted Querier Received V1 Reports Received V2 Reports Received V3 Reports Received V2 Leave Received Router Port Port Status User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Description The VLAN ID of the entry Working Querier Version currently Working Host Version currently Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE The number of Transmitted Querier The number of Received Querier The number of Received V1 Reports The number of Received V2 Reports The number of Received V3 Reports The number of Received V2 Leave Display which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port Both denote the specific port is configured or
342. imple Network Management Protocol ccccsssssseeeseeenseeeeeensseeeeeeseeeeeooesseeeseoeenseeessoesseeeseoenaseessooaas 77 4371 NMP ONO US W ir a A A a a a a 77 4 3 2 SNMP System Configuration ccccccsccccssscecceeecccceseecceuseecceueeecsueeecsuseeseuecessuseeessueeeeseueeessgeesssueeeesauseesseseessaaes 78 AS S SNMP Trap Conngura ON sosser ine ene r A A A A AS 79 434 SNMP System Mo Mato cesses e e e a E e a car ia ios 81 4 30 NMP Vo COATIgURAtON e a aa a le dan eds 82 IS A E 82 A oZ SNMPYV S USES araea A A AS 83 A520 3 OINMIEYS TOUS air E E E 84 430 AO NMIPVS VICWS o a a tal ll ade ol ie 85 A MIS PNG CS o io E 86 AA Port Management a 38 AAT POT CcoOnigura ON oa urhacuend enaa aa ec Sdnacee advected ansrdsedets eeu A a 88 442 OF Olas CS OVENIEW test is nase Ae a a o ital eS O 90 443 Port Statistics Della cia ad 91 o A Ie dee Didone seaesteses besos enfeiy doa Sede theced stideae antes aan ee 93 AA Me OU NVM oe tee ie o ge ga daar ate gracel Pasa net tana bev eatenes eaten 94 AS EINK AGGICOAON iia 97 45 UAC AAG GIS ALON Ns ti A A NS A AS A AN AA AA ESA RA 99 AS Z LAGP COMMNQUE ANON A A ia O E did 100 Aoo DACP SYVSIOM SAWS ic 102 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R AO A AGE POM Status o a a a o o eS eth 103 AO LAGCP ROSSO ea 104 AONEAN isis 106 A ee NC en ey Mee ee eee RON eee en a eRe ene eenPe Rear Tete rar 106 ASG 2 EEE 802 iC VEAN ri 107 420 5 VLAN Basic ROMO AA AA AA 110 ADA VLAN Port SOM tIg
343. ing data over that port 2 1 3 Switch Rear Panel The rear panel of the Managed Switch indicates an AC inlet power socket which accepts input power from 100 to 240V AC 50 60Hz Figure 2 4 amp Figure 2 5 shows the rear panel of these Managed Switches WGSW 24040 Rear Panel Figure 2 4 Rear panel of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Rear Panel Figure 2 5 Rear panel of WGSW 24040R Mi AC Power Receptacle For compatibility with electric service in most areas of the world the Managed Switch s power supply automatically adjusts to line power in the range 100 240VAC and 50 60 Hz Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptalbe on the rear panel of the Managed Switch Plug the other end of the power cord into an electric service outlet then the power will be ready The device is a power required device it means it will not work till it is powered If your networks should active all the time please consider using UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply for your device It will Power Notice prevent you from network data loss or network downtime In some area installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your Managed Switch from being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the Switch or the power adapter 32 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Mi DC Power Connector The rear panel of the WGSW 24040R contains a power switch and a DC power connector which accepts DC power input voltage from
344. iod is set to 289 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds e Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds This attribute must comply with the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval e Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port e Mode Select LLDP mode Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors b
345. ion Server Configuration lessee iw saressesnone Pom e Figure 4 11 7 Authentication Server Configuration page screenshot 245 The page includes the following fields Port State User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R These setting are common for all of the Authentication Servers Object e Timeout e Dead Time Description The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured RADIUS Authenticatio
346. ion refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches However before making any physical connections between devices use the Link aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port link aggregation note that e The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type RJ 45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop It allows a maxim
347. ions relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media 300 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Policy Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the device Can be either Defined or Unknown Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown Defined The network policy is defined e TAG TAG is indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged ot Untagged Untagged The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format e VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead e Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of eight priority levels 0 through 7 e DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavi
348. iority lt msti gt lt port_list gt lt priority gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt priority gt STP port priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 Default 128 463 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 9 Link Aggregation Command Aggregation Configuration Description Show link aggregation configuration Syntax Aggr Configuration Aggregation Add Description Add or modify link aggregation Syntax Aggr Add lt port_list gt lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID 1 14 Example Add port 1 4 in Group1 WGSW 24040 gt aggr add 1 4 1 Aggregation Delete Description Delete link aggregation Syntax Aggr Delete lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID 1 14 Example 464 Delete Group2 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt aggr delete 2 Aggregation Lookup Description Lookup link aggregation Syntax Aggr Lookup lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID 1 14 Aggregation Mode Description Set or show the link aggregation traffic distribution mode Syntax Aggr Mode smac dmaclip port enable disable Parameters smac Source MAC address dmac _ Destination MAC address ip Source and destination
349. is management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Net work management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only Knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the Managed Switch are public a i SNMP Agent Status Enabled tesina dlls PC Workstation EA with A e SNMP application IP Address interneti i 192 168 0 100 Lie a AO IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 3 5 SNMP management 43 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 WEB CONFIGURATION This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web Based management About Web based Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer The Web Based Management supports Internet Explorer 7 0 It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen By default IE7 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The user has to explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java App
350. is required to connect the switch to the PC After making this connection configure the terminal emulation program to use the following parameters The default parameters are le 115200 bps a 8 data bits E No parity a 1 stop bit COM1 Properties Port Settings Bits per second 115200 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control More Restore Defaults Figure 3 2 Terminal parameter settings You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any 41 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 3 4 Web Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the switch you can access the Managed Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE Browser IP Address RJ 45 UTP Cable
351. issions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled The current state of the port It can undertake one of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Lin
352. it ID Remote ID 0 O O 0 Client Statistics Transmit to Client Receive from Client Receive Agent Option Replace Agent Option Keep Agent Option Drop Agent Option O 0 0 0 O 0 0 Auto Refresh LJ Figure 4 2 12 DHCP Relay Statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Server Statistics Object Description e Transmit to Server The packets number that relayed from client to server e Transmit Error The packets number that errors sending packets to clients e Receive from Server The packets number that received packets from server e Receive Missing Agent The packets number that received packets without agent information options Option e Receive Missing The packets number that received packets which the Circuit ID option was Circuit ID missing e Receive Missing The packets number that received packets which Remote ID option was missing Remote ID e Receive Bad Circuit ID The packets number that the Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID e Receive Bad Remote The packets number that the Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID ID 62 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Client Statistics Object Description e Transmit to Client The packets number that relayed packets from server to client e Transmit Error The packets number that error sending packets to servers e Receive from Client The packets number that received packets from server e Receive Agent Option
353. iteria are used The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading 0 s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs VLAN 235 e Port State e Restart User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transm
354. k Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the quiet period of 236 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved v
355. l default All ports 372 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Default Setting 1 Example Add port1 to port4 in VLAN10 WGSW 24040 gt vlan add 10 1 4 VLAN Forbidden Add Description Add or modify VLAN entry in forbidden table Syntax VLAN Forbidden Add lt vid gt lt name gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Frobidden add port1 to port4 in VLAN10 WGSW 24040 gt vlan forbidden add 10 1 4 VLAN Delete Description Delete VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Delete lt vid gt lt name gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name Example Delete VLAN10 WGSW 24040 gt vlan delete 10 373 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R VLAN Forbidden Delete Description Delete VLAN entry Syntax LAN Forbidden Delete lt vid gt lt name gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name Example Forbidden delete VLAN10 WGSW 24040 gt vlan forbidden delete 10 VLAN Forbidden Lookup Description Lookup VLAN Forbidden port entry Syntax VLAN Forbidden Lookup lt vid gt name lt name gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs name VLAN name string lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name shou
356. l Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Translate Dynamic to Static Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries 4 12 13 ARP Inspection Static Table This page provides Static ARP Inspection Table The Static ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 12 13 appears Static ARP Inspection Table Figure 4 12 13 Static ARP Inspection Table screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLANID The VLAN ID for the settings e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets e IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets Buttons Add New Enty Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table Save Click to save changes _Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 281 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 13 Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both s
357. l Port Tx Frames Rx Frames Rx Errors Frames Discarded TLVs Discarded TLVs Unrecognized Org Discarded Age Outs Description The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port The number of LLDP frames received on the port The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information Known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value The number of organizationally TLVs received Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the local counters All counters including global counters are cleared up
358. l location info e Name e Zip code Description The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture County parish gun Japan district City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen City division borough city district ward chou Japan Neighborhood block Street Example Poppelvej Leading street direction Example N Trailing street suffix Example SW Street suffix Example Ave Platz House number Example 21 House number suffix Example A 1 2 Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University Additional location info Example South Wing Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jahn Postal zip code Example 2791 294 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Building Building structure Example Low Library e Apartment Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 e Floor Floor Example 4 e Room no Room number Example 450F e Place type Place type Example Office e Postal community Postal community name Example Leonia name e P O Box Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 e Additional code Additional code Example 1320300003 Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA Object Description e Emergency Call Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry t
359. l values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled when you click on Save The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs _ Addl New Enty Click to add new VLAN Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 115 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN ID input fields kx Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 6 6 VLAN Membership Status This page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4 6 4 appears VLAN Membership Status for Combined Users Combined w Start fram WLAN with entries per page Port Members AAA rte viano 2 3 4 6 8 9 0 011203005 0 7 59 25 20 22122 23 25 aaa 7 1 41 7 7 1 17 ka 1 17 7 ka 7 Auto refresh Dl Figure 4 6 4 VLAN Membership Status for Static User page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN User A VLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN CLI Web SNMP This are
360. lculates parameters for setting up each switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802 11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs and can choose one to connect to based on pre configuration or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one wikipedia SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin TELNET and rsh protocols which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality Wikipedia SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsoleted by RSTP SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet This functionality is used to make a network clock frequency synchronized Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized IEEE 1588 971 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R TACACS is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controll
361. ld contain atleast one alphabet VLAN Lookup Description Lookup VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Lookup lt vid gt name lt name gt combined static nas mvr voice_vlan all Parameters 3 4 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs name VLAN name string lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet combined Shows All the Combined VLAN database static Shows the VLAN entries configured by the administrator nas Shows the VLANs configured by NAS mvr Shows the VLANs configured by MVR voice_vlan Shows the VLANs configured by Voice VLAN all Shows all VLANs configuration default combined VLAN Users configuration Example Show VLAN status WGSW 24040 gt vlan lookup VID VLAN Name default VLAN Name Add Description Add VLAN Name to a VLAN ID Mapping Syntax VLAN Name Add lt name gt lt vid gt Parameters lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Example Add VLAN name for VLAN 1 WGSW 24040 gt vlan name add test 1 375 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R VLAN Name Delete Description Delete VLAN Name to VLAN ID Mapping Syntax VLAN Name Delete lt name gt
362. le Use the lt lt button to start over 285 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e IP Address The IP address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh o Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Clear Flushes all dynamic entries Liceul Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by IP address and then by IP mask The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 13 4 appears Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Start from WYLAN and IF address 0 6 0 0 with 20 entries per page Auto refresh Ll Figure 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP So
363. lect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave 157 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R message and query messages that are specific to a given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below Mon Member Leave Group Stop Timer Jain Group Send Report Start Timer Leave Group Query Received Start Timer Delaying Member Report Recely Idle Member Stop Timer Timer Expried Send report Figure 4 8 4 IGMP State Transitions a IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Note 4 8 2 IGMP Snooping Configuration This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration The IGMP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 5 appears 158 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R IGMP Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled F Unregistered IPMCyv4 Flooding E
364. led Disabled w Disabled eck ea Figure 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration page screenshot Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled w Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 18 O Pam e 19 0 Pam a 0 Pam v 2 O o Per v 24 O o Pe v The page includes the following fields Description Object 218 e Port e Policy ID e Action e Rate Limiter ID e Port Redirect e Mirror e Logging e Shutdown e State e Counter Buttons SIVE Click to save changes User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 0 through 255 The default value is 0 Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit Select which rate limiter to apply on this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16 The default value is Disabled Select which port frames are redirected on The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number and it can t be set when action is permitted The default value is Disabled Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Specify the logging operation of this port The
365. lets to use network ports The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection make sure the manager PC must be set on same the IP subnet address with the Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the SGSW Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC PC Workstation with IE Browser LANAS IP Address RJ 45 UTP Cable 192 168 0 100 EY IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 4 1 1 Web Management 44 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R m Logging on the switch li Use Internet Explorer 7 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP Address as following http 192 168 0 100 2 When the following login screen appears please enter the default username admin with password admin or the username password you have changed via console to login the main screen of Managed Switch The login screen in Figure 4 1 2 appears Connect to 197 168 0 100 The server 192 168 0 100 at Web Management requires a username and p
366. level group Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Group lt group_ name gt lt cro gt lt crw gt lt sro gt lt srw gt Parameters lt group_ names Privilege group name 383 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt cro gt Configuration read only privilege level 1 15 lt crw gt Configuration Execute read write privilege level 1 15 lt sro gt Status Statistics read only privilege level 1 15 lt srw gt Status Statistics read write privilege level 1 15 Example Change privilege level of MVR group WGSW 24040 gt security switch privilege level group mvr 15 15 15 15 Security Switch Privilege Level Current Description Show the current privilege level Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Current Default Setting 15 Security Switch Authentication Configuration Description Show Auth configuration Syntax Security Switch Auth Configuration Example Show authentication configuration WGSW 24040 gt security switch auth configuration Auth Configuration 384 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R console local Disabled telnet local Disabled ssh local Disabled web local Disabled Security Switch Authentication Method Description Set or show Auth method default Show Auth method Syntax Security Switch Auth Method console telnet ssh web none local radius tacacs enable disable Parameters console Settings for consol
367. licant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Note Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forev
368. ll string User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Add new user username test password test amp privilege 10 WGSW 24040 gt security switch users add test test 10 Security Switch User Delete Description Delete users entry Syntax Security Switch Users Delete lt user_name gt Parameters lt user_names gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores Example Delete test account WGSW 24040 gt security switch users delete user Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration Description Show privilege configuration Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration Example Show privilege level WGSW 24040 gt security switch privilege level configuration Privilege Level Configuration Privilege Current Level 15 Group Name Priviliege Level 382 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R CRO CRW SRO SRW 5 10 5 10 Diagnostics 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 Loop Protect MAC_ Table 5 10 5 10 MVR 5 10 5 10 Maintenance 15 15 15 15 Mirroring 5 10 5 10 Multicast 5 10 5 10 Port_Security 5 10 5 10 Ports 5 10 Private_VLANs Protocol based VLAN 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 1 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 Security Switch Privilege Level Group Description Configure a privilege
369. llows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 1 appears 288 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R LLDP Configuration LLDP Parameters IM Tx LLDP Port Configuration CDP Aware Port Description System Name System Description System Capabilities Management Address t IEEE 4 4 4 4 4 x EE El El El O EEE El El El O lt e Es Es E la O EEE El El El O a dl al LI Disabled LI dl d LE E E A 3 4 al tal elle TEE 4 4 EE na mE 4 lt e Es El El El E E EEE El El El El EE EEE El El El EE lt e E El El El El EE e El El El E Figure 4 14 1 LLDP Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields LLDP Parameters Object Description e Tx Interval The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier lt 65536 and Transmission Interval gt 4 Delay Interval e Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid per
370. m Configuration Configure RMON Alarm table on this page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 18 1 appears RMON Alarm Configuration Sample Startup Rising Rising Falling Falling aa Ne Es Figure 4 18 1 RMON Alarm configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold The range is from 1 to 2431 1 e Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled the possible variables are InOctets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing 319 Buttons Sample Type e Value e Startup Alarm Rising Threshold Rising Index Falling Threshold Falling Index User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R characters InUcastPkts The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol InNUcastPkts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol InDiscards The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal InErrors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol InUnknownProtos the number of the inbound packets that were discarded because of the
371. m MAC address and VLAN input fields Clear Flushes all dynamic entries kx Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 287 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 14 LLDP 4 14 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology 4 14 2 LLDP Configuration This page a
372. m the same VLAN members The screen in Figure 4 6 8 appears and Table 4 6 9 describes the port configuration of the Managed Switches 122 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R A SS SS A A A A w a Cy a E O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SS DO PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Untagged Tagged Untagged Untagged Tagged VLAN 2 VLAN 3 hs y W a Figure 4 6 8 two separate VLAN diagram VLAN Group 1 Table 4 1 VLAN and Port Configuration The scenario described as follow E Untagged packet entering VLAN 2 k While PC 1 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 1 the Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 2 PC 2 and PC 3 will received the packet through Port 2 and Port 3 2 PC 4 PC 5 and PC 6 received no packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 4 While the packet leaves Port 3 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 a Tagged packet entering VLAN 2 5 While PC 3 transmit a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 enters Port 3 PC 1 and PC 2 will received the packet through Port 1 and Port 2 6 While the packet leaves Port 1 and Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet E Untagged packet entering VLAN 3 123 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 1 While PC 4 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 4 the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 3 PC 5 and
373. matic refresh of the page at regular intervals Retesh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 4 5 Port Mirror Configure port Mirroring on this page This function provide to monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Mirroring UP Link source Port Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro Figure 4 4 5 Port Mirror application The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring e Mirror Port Configuration The Port Mirror screen in Figure 4 4 6 appears 94 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Mirror Configuration Port to mirror to Mirror Port Configuration Figure 4 4 6 Mirror Configuration page screenshot The page includes the
374. mber Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 When there is no any source filtering address the text None is shown in the Source Address field e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny Buttons Auto refresh Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 179 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields kee Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR SFM Information Table gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 180 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 9 Quality of Service 4 9 1 Understand QOS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on
375. me Postal community name p_o box Post office box P O Box additional_code Addtional code default Show Civic Address Location configuration lt civic_value gt lldpmed The value for the Civic Address Location entry LLDPMED ECS Description Set or show LLDP MED Emergency Call Service 479 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Syntax LLDPMED ecs lt ecs_value gt Parameters lt ecs_value gt lldpmed The value for the Emergency Call Service LLDPMED Policy Delete Description Delete the selected policy Syntax LLDPMED policy delete lt policy_list gt Parameters lt policy_list gt List of policies to delete Example Delete the policy 1 WGSW 24040 gt lldpmed policy delete 1 LLDPMED Policy Add Description Adds a policy to the list of polices Syntax LLDPMED policy add lt policy_type gt tagged untagged lt vlan_id gt lt I2_priority gt lt dscp gt Parameters lt policy_type gt The policy_type parameter takes the following values voice Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications voice_signaling Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media guest_
376. meout lt timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt SNMP trap inform timeout 0 2147 seconds Default Setting 1 Example Set SNMP trap inform timeout in 20sec WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp trap inform timeout 20 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform retry times Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times lt retries gt Parameters lt retries gt SNMP trap inform retransmited times 0 255 default Show SNMP trap inform retry times Default Setting 5 Example Set SNMP trap inform retry times in 10 399 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp trap inform retry times 10 Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID Description Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap security engine ID probe disable Disable SNMP trap security engine ID probe default Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp trap probe security engine id disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID Description Set or show SNMP trap security engine ID Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID lt engineid gt Parameters lt engi
377. movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast IP Source Guard LACP LLDP IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port 064 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a s
378. mporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of O ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 RADIUS Accounting Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object e Packet Counters Description RADIUS accounting server packet counter There are five receive and four transmit counters Direction Name Rx Responses Rx Malformed Responses 253 RFC4670 Name Description radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS Responses packets valid or invalid received from the server radiusAccClientExt The number of malformed MalformedRespons RADIUS packets received es from the server Malformed Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx Tx User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Requests Retransmissions Pending Requests Timeouts 254 radiusAcctClientExt BadAuthenticators radiusAccClientExt Unkno
379. n Set or show the port VLAN frame type Syntax VLAN FrameType lt port_list gt all tagged Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports all Allow tagged and untagged frames tagged Allow tagged frames only default Show accepted frame types Default Setting All Example Set port10 that allow tagged frames only WGSW 24040 gt vlan frametype 10 tagged 369 VLAN Ingress Filter Description Set or show the port VLAN ingress filter Syntax VLAN IngressFilter lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable VLAN ingress filtering disable Disable VLAN ingress filtering default Show VLAN ingress filtering Default Setting Disable Example Enable VLAN ingress filtering for port10 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt vlan ingressfilter 10 enable VLAN Mode Description Set or show the VLAN Mode Syntax VLAN Mode portbased dot1q Parameters portbased _ Port Based VLAN Mode dotiq 802 1Q VLAN Mode default Show VLAN Mode Default Setting IEEE 802 1Q Example Set VLAN mode in port base 370 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt vlan mode portbased VLAN Link Type Description Set or show the port VLAN link type Syntax VLAN LinkType lt port_list gt untagged tagged Parameters lt port_list gt P
380. n Figure 4 5 3 appears 99 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Aggregation Group Configuration Port Members ret srw w a 2 3 5 6 F e i ieee Mormal 000000000000 0000000000000 0000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 COODOOOOODOCO 0000000000000 0000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000 000000000000 00000000090000 00000000090000 0000000000000 0000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000 ESET Figure 4 5 3 Aggregation Group Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port e Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 5 2 LACP Configuration Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member
381. n Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are Object o e Enabled e IP Address Hostname e Port e Secret Description The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch 246 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of columns which are Object o e Enabled e IP Address Hostname e Port e Secret Description The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server The secret up to 29 characters long shar
382. n be 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF 43 or Default Default means that the default classified value is not modified by this QCE Buttons Save Click to save the configuration and move to main QCL page Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page without saving the configuration change 4 9 12 QoS Status This page shows the QCL status by different QCL users Each row describes the QCE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch The QoS Control List Status screen in Figure 4 9 15 appears Contine Autovefresh E QoS Control List Status QOCE Frame Type Port Conflict Mo entries 199 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Figure 4 9 15 QoS Control List Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e User e QCE e Frame Type e Port e Action e Conflict Buttons Description Indicates the QCL user Indicates the index of QCE Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE
383. n gt Parameters global Select the global Guest VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port Guest VLAN setting default Show current per port Guest VLAN state enable disable enable Enable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current Guest VLAN state lt vid gt Guest VLAN ID used when entering the Guest VLAN Use the global keyword to change it default Show current Guest VLAN ID lt reauth_max gt The value can only be set if you use the global keyword in the beginning of the command The number of times a Request Identity EAPOL frame is sent without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN 426 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R default Show current Maximum Reauth Count value lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt The value can only be set if you use the global keyword in the beginning of the command disable The Guest VLAN can only be entered if no EAPOL frames have been received on a port for the lifetime of the port enable The Guest VLAN can be entered even if an EAPOL frame has been received during the lifetime of the port default Show current setting Default Setting disable Example Enable NAS guest VLAN WGSW 24040 gt security network nas guest_vlan enable Security Network NAS Authenticate Description Refresh restart 802 1X authentication process Syntax Secu
384. n in Figure 4 17 1 appears Retresh sFlow Configuration Recelver Configuration IP Address Hostname UDF Port seconds Max Datagram Size bytes Flow Sampler Counter Poller Port Enabled Sampling Rate Enabled Interval A o y d O o 128 128 128 128 125 128 128 kh fbfefbje jeje fe Figure 4 17 1 sFlow Configuration page screenshot 314 The page includes the following fields Receiver Configuration Object e Owner e IP Address Hostname e UDP Port e Timeout e Max Datagram Size Port Configuration Object e Port e Flow Sampler Enabled e Flow Sampler Sampling Rate User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Description Basically sFlow can be configured in two ways Through local management using the Web or CLI interface or through SNMP This read only field shows the owner of the current sFlow configuration and assumes values as follows e If sFlow is currently unconfigured unclaimed Owner contains lt none gt e If sFlow is currently configured through Web or CLI Owner contains lt Configured through local management gt e If sFlow is currently configured through SNMP Owner contains a string identifying the sFlow receiver If sFlow is configured through SNMP all controls except for the Release button are disabled to avoid inadvertent reconfiguration The Refresh button allows for releasing the current owner and disable sFlow sampling The button is disabled if sFlow is
385. n it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server Configure DHCP Snooping on this page The DHCP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 8 appears DHCP Snooping Configuration a E i lt 4 i a lt 3 2 lt i a lt a F lt Figure 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping Configuration screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation e Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Configuration Trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping The statistics only counter packet under DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled And it doesn t count the DHCP packets for system DHCP client The DHC
386. nabled IGMP SSM Range 232 0 0 0 re Leave Proxy Enabled d Proxy Enabled F Port Related Configuration Router Port Throttling di d d d d Pi L d Figure 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping e Unregistered IPMCv4 Enable unregistered IPMCvV4 traffic flooding Flooding Enabled The flooding control takes effect only when IGMP Snooping is enabled When IGMP Snooping is disabled unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding is always active in spite of this setting e IGMP SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range e Leave Proxy Enable Enable IGMP Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side 159 e Proxy Enable e Router Port e Fast Leave e Throtting Click to save changes screen in Figure 4 8 6 appears User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Enable IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Specify which ports act as IGMP router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP router port Auto Select
387. nded to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class IIl The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class and Media Endpoint Class ll classes and are extended to 299 e LLDP MED Capabilities e Application Type User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identification Extended Power via MDI PSE Extended Power via MDI PD
388. neid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string Example Set the SNMP trap security engine ID WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp trap security engine id 800007e5017f000011 400 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name Description Set or show SNMP trap security name Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name lt security_name gt Parameters lt security_name gt A string representing the security name for a principal default Show SNMP trap security name The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Set the SNMP trap security name WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp trap security name 12345678 Security Switch SNMP Engine ID Description Set or show SNMPv3 local engine ID Syntax Security Switch SNMP Engine ID lt engineid gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string Default Setting 800007e501 7f000001 Example Set 800007e501 7f000002 for SNMPv3 local engine ID WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp engine id 800007e501 7f000002 Security Switch SNMP Community Add Description 401 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Add or modify SNMPv3 community entry The entry index key is lt community gt Syntax Security Switch
389. ness variable value is 2 Query Interval The Query Interval variable denotes the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds Query Response Interval The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds Last Listener Query Interval The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last listener query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a node s initial report of interest in a multicast address The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields k Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt gt Update
390. new group entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 5 4 SNMPv3 Views Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 Views screen in Figure 4 3 7 appears SNMPv3 View Configuration View E OID Subtree Figure 4 3 7 SNMPv3 Views Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed 85 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view type are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded General if a view entry s view type is excluded it should be exist another view entry which view type is included and it s OID subtree overstep the excluded view entry e OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new view entry
391. ng disable QoS DSCP EgressRemap Description Set or show DSCP egress remap table This table is used if the port egress remarking mode is remap and the purpose is 497 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R to map the classified DSCP to a new DSCP value Syntax QoS DSCP EgressRemap lt dscp_list gt lt dscp gt Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 list or all lt dscp gt Egress remapped DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 QoS Port Storm Unicast Description Set or show the port storm rate limiter for unicast frames Syntax QoS Port Storm Unicast lt port_list gt enable disable lt rate gt kbps fps Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable storm policing of unicast frames disable Disable storm policing of unicast frames lt rate gt Rate in kbps or fps 100 13200000 kbps Unit is kilo bits per second fps Unit is frames per second Default Setting disable Example Enable unicast storm control in 2kbps WGSW 24040 gt QoS Port Storm Unicast enable 2 QoS Port Storm Multicast Description Set or show the port storm rate limiter for broadcast frames Syntax 498 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R QoS Port Storm Broadcast lt port_list gt enable disable lt rate gt kbps fps Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable storm policing of b
392. ng DES authentication protocol A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Add New Entry Click to add a new user entry SAVE Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 5 3 SNMPv3 Groups Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page The entry index keys are Security Model and Security Name The SNMPv3 Groups screen in Figure 4 3 6 appears SNMPv3 Group Configuration iek default_user The page includes the following fields Figure 4 3 6 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration page screenshot 84 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a
393. ng Point to Point Protocol PPP frames inside Ethernet frames It is used mainly with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver modem over Ethernet and in plain Metro Ethernet networks Wikipedia In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted AVLAN can be configured as a private VLAN PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems O 568 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual application QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or p
394. ng untagged frames lt vlan_id gt VLAN id lt I2_priority gt This field may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 lt dscp gt This field shall contain the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 5 This 6 bit field may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 LLDPMED Port Policy Description Set or show LLDP MED port polcies Syntax LLDPMED port policies lt port_list gt lt policy_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt policy_list gt List of policies to delete 481 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R LLDPMED Coordinates Description Set or show LLDP MED Location Syntax LLDPMED Coordinates lt tude_type gt lt direction gt coordinate_value Parameters lt tude_type gt The tude_type parameter takes the following values latitude Latitude O to 90 degrees with max 4 digits Positive numbers are north of the equator and negative numbers are south of the equator longitude Longitude O to 180 degrees with max 4 digits Positive values are East of the prime meridian and negative numbers are West of the prime meridian altitude Altitude 32767 to 32767 Meters or floors with max 4 digits lt direction gt The dire
395. nk 1 000 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Full Duplex Trunk Table 4 7 2 Recommended STP Path Costs Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 000 000 Trunk 500 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 147 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex Trunk Table 4 7 3 Default STP Path Costs 4 7 5 MSTI Priorities This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Priority screen in Figure 4 7 10 appears MSTI Configuration MSTI Priority Configuration MSTI Priority CIST 32768 Y MST 3276 W MSTIZ 3276 W MSTS 3276 W MSTl4 3276 W MSTS 3276 4 MSTIE 3276 W MSTI 32760 4 Figure 4 7 10 MSTI Priority page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active e Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numerical values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 148 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 7 6 MSTI Configuration This page allows th
396. nnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnranrnnenananes 381 SECUN Switch USSR AdO nir A 381 SECY Witch User Delete A EEO 382 Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration ooccccconcococonnncococonoconcnnocononconononononcnnononcnnnnonnnnnnnranonnnranenananess 382 Security Switch Privilege Level Group cccccecccccsececceeececcesecccceucecceseecseueeesseuseessaueeessueeessegeeesseeeessgesesseneeesas 383 Security Switch Privilege Level Current cccccccssececcesececceeeecceeeeecceeseecseeeecseseeessugeeeseeeesseuseessgeeeesegesesseeeeses 384 security Switch Authentication Configuration iii A levee ceded Asien ied es 384 security Witch Authentication Method ii isla 385 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Secuiity Switch gt COMU ION o o a O 386 Security Switch SSH MOE a La te ee A 386 Security SWITCH THES CONTIGUA td la dd lO 387 SECUIILY Switch HTI PS Mode cout o A A rr da 387 SEGUI SWN HTI PS RC tl da as 388 Security Switch Access COMlIGUIATION vs Li das rn ees Saeed eo 388 Secun SWIC ACCESS MOd Estaria 389 Security Switch Access Add cccccccssececcsececceneeccceueeeceeeecseueeecseueeeseueeeseueeesseueeessaeceesegeeesseueeessgeeessuseessegeessaas 389 Security Switch ACCESS PVG Add o e A a tla Sa a NS oe eh gt tee 390 Sec rity S WIEN ACCESS Delete ai 391 Security SWIICh ACCESS LOOK Dd dad 391 Security Switch Access Clear setoiariinit a ld titi 391 SEGUI SWIEMNACCESS AUS del a ll o 392 Security Switch SNMP Con
397. nted as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 PING Length keyword Ping ICMP data length 2 1452 Default is 56 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers PING Count keyword Transmit ECHO_REQUEST packet count 1 60 Default is 5 PING Interval keyword lt ping_interval gt Ping interval 0 30 Default is 0 Example WGSW 24040 gt ip ipv6 ping 2001 0002 PING6 server 2001 2 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 3 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad 353 IP NTP Configuration Description Show NTP configuration Syntax IP NTP Configuration Default Setting IP NTP Configuration NTP Mode Disabled Idx Server IP host address a b c d or a host name string 1 pool ntp org 2 europe pool ntp org 3 north america pool ntp org 4 asia pool ntp org 5 oceania pool ntp org IP NTP Mode Description Set or show the NTP mode
398. nterface that the host IP address matched the entry e SNMP Indicates the host can access the switch from SNMP interface that the host IP address matched the entry e TELNET SSH Indicates the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH interface that the host IP address matched the entry Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new access management entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 268 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics This page provides statistics for access management The Access Management Statistics screen in Figure 4 12 3 appears Access Management Statistics Received Packets Allowed Packets Discarded Packets HTTP 0 0 Ll HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The interface that allowed remote host can access the switch e Receive Packets The received packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled e Allow Packets The allowed packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled e Discard Packets The discarded packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic
399. nternet exists and is connected ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both PPPoE is an acronym for Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet It is a network protocol for encapsulati
400. ntory AB Voice Defined Untagged Voice Signaling Defined Untagged se Auto negotiation A Auto negotiation Capabilities MAU Type JODUBASE T half duplex mode 1000BASE x Lx 5 CX eo es supported Enabled full duplex mode Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE for UTP full du ae full duplex inks Symmetric PAUSE for full duplex links i P Figure 4 14 3 LLDP MED Neighbor Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object Description e Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 298 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes
401. ntries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 13 3 appears Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Start from VLAN MAC address and IP address 0000 with 20 entries per page YLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Auto refresh L Figure 4 13 3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table The Start from port address VLAN MAC address and IP address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed tab
402. nts packet loss with back pressure Half Duplex and IEEE 802 3x PAUSE frame flow control Full Duplex m High performance of Store and Forward architecture and runt CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth E Storm Control support broadcast Unicast Support VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Up to 256 VLANs groups out of 4095 VLAN IDs Provider Bridging VLAN Q in Q support IEEE 802 1ad Private VLAN Edge PVE Protocol based VLAN MAC based VLAN Voice VLAN E Support Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol spanning tree by VLAN BPDU Guard E Support Link Aggregation 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Cisco ether channel Static Trunk Maximum 14 trunk groups up to 8 ports per trunk group Up to 16Gbps bandwidth Duplex Mode m Provide Port Mirror many to 1 m Port Mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port Loop protection to avoid broadcast loops gt Quality of Service E 8 priority queues on all switch ports A Traffic classification IEEE 802 1p CoS IP TOS DSCP IP Precedence IP TCP UDP port number 24 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Typical network application Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin WRR CoS policies Traffic policing polic
403. o trap UPNP related packets to CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled e TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 e Advertising Duration The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive a SSDP advertisement message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the duration it will think that the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 99 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R E My Network Places Cc E File Edit View Favorites Tools Help qe E Back gt Ba ya Search Key Folders Hab Address E my Network Places Ea Ae Network Tasks 2 Add a network place al a View network z connections JI P z Jet up a wireless network For a home or small office Search Active Directory EN Hide icons For networked UPnP devices Print Server Print Server RDO
404. ocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Lt Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 273 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 12 7 Port Security Detail This page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The Port Security Detail screen in Figure 4 12 7 appears Port Security Port Status Port 1 MAC Address VLAN ID Time of Addition Age Hold No MAC addresses attached Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 12 7 Port Security D
405. ode Tagging Priority LLO1 Interface Channel Setting Immediate Leave Setting Immediate Leave E 3 4 j t ES ES L 4 A A 3 4 ollollullo HEEL A NA NANA Figure 4 8 17 MVR Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MVR Mode Enable Disable the Global MVR The Unregistered Flooding control depends on the current configuration in IGMP MLD Snooping It is suggested to enable Unregistered Flooding control when the MVR group 175 Delete MVR VID MVR Name Mode Tagging Priority LLQI Interface Channel Setting Port Port Role User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R table is full Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save Specify the Multicast VLAN ID Be Caution MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management VLAN ports MVR Name is an optional attribute to indicate the name of the specific MVR VLAN Maximum length of the MVR VLAN Name string is 32 MVR VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers When the optional MVR VLAN name is given it should contain at least one alphabet MVR VLAN name can be edited for the existing MVR VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries Specify the MVR mode of operation In Dynamic mode MVR allows dynamic MVR membership reports on source ports In Compatible mode MVR membership reports are forbidden on sour
406. odified QCE will be in the same location in the list To modify and move the entry to last in the list use the word last for lt qce_id_next gt Syntax QoS QCL Add lt qce_id gt lt qce_id_next gt lt port_list gt lt tag gt lt vid gt lt pcp gt lt dei gt lt smac gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt LLC lt DSAP gt lt SSAP gt lt control gt SNAP lt PID gt ipv4 lt protocol gt lt sip gt lt dscp gt lt fragment gt lt sport gt lt dport gt ipv6 lt protocol gt lt sip_v6 gt lt dscp gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt class gt lt dp gt lt classified_dscp gt Parameters lt qce_id gt lt qce_id_next gt lt port_list gt lt tag gt lt vid gt lt pcp gt lt dei gt lt smac gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt Ilc lt dsap gt lt ssap gt lt control gt snap lt pid gt ipv4 lt protocol gt lt sip gt lt dscp gt QCE ID 1 256 default Next available ID Next QCE ID next_id 1 256 or last Port List port lt port_list gt or all default All ports Frame tag untag taglany VID 1 4095 or any either a specific VID or range of VIDs Priority Code Point specific O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or any Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 or any Source MAC address xx xx xx or any 24 MS bits OUI Destination MAC
407. of the same LAG This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well The LACP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The LACP Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 4 appears 100 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R LACP Port Configuration LACP Enabled Priority 3276 3276 3476 Fast w DO Fast w 3276 Fast 3276 Fast w 3276 Fast w 3276 Timeout al Fast Fast w au 5 4 5 4 Fast Fast JarO F 4 d P L L d LI d d JARRE F 4 Figure 4 5 4 LACP Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2G LAGs per stack e Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot The default setting is Auto e Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets 101 User s Manual of
408. ol to switch the setting 176 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R indicates Inactive S indicates Source R indicates Receiver The default Role is Inactive e Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port Buttons Add New MVR VLAN Click to add new MVR VLAN Specify the VID and configure the new entry Click Save Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 15 MVR Status This page provides MVR status The MVR Status screen in Figure 4 8 18 appears MVR Statistics YLAN ID IGMP MLD IGMP MLD IGMPyvi1 IGMPy MLDv1 IGMP 3 MLDv IGMPv2 MLDw1 Queries Received Queries Transmitted Joins Received Reports Received Reports Received Leaves Received Mo more entres Auto refresh L Figure 4 8 18 MVR Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID The Multicast VLAN ID e IGMP MLD Queries The number of Received Queries for IGMP and MLD respectively Received e IGMP MLD Queries The number of Transmitted Queries for IGMP and MLD respectively Transmitted e IGMPv1 Joins The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins Received e IGMPv2 MLDv1 The number of Received IGMPv2 Joins and MLDv1 Reports respectively Reports Received e IGMPv3 MLDv2 The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins and MLDv2 Reports respectively Reports Received e IGMPv2 MLDv1 Leaves The number of Received IGMPv2 L
409. old value 2147483648 2147483647 lt rising event_index gt Rising event index 1 65535 lt falling_threshold gt Falling threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 lt falling_event_index gt Falling event index 1 65535 rising Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold falling Trigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold both Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less than the falling threshold default Security Switch RMON Alarm Delete Description Delete RMON Alarm entry The entry index key is lt alarm_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON Alarm Delete lt alarm_id gt Parameters lt alarm_id gt Alarm ID 1 65535 Security Switch RMON Alarm Lookup Description Show RMON Alarm entries Syntax Security Switch RMON Alarm Lookup lt alarm_id gt Parameters lt alarm_id gt Alarm ID 1 65535 413 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Switch RMON Event Add Description Add or modify RMON Event entry The entry index key is lt event_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON Event Add lt event_id gt none log trap log_trap lt community gt lt description gt Parameters lt event_ id gt Event ID 1 65535 none Get the sample directly log Get the sample directly trap Get the sample directly log_trap Calculate the difference between samples defa
410. ole of the ICST port The port role can be one of the following values AlternatePort BackupPort RootPort DesignatedPort Disable e State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values Disabled Learning Forwarding e Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Lt Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 7 9 Port Statistics This page displays the STP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 7 15 appears STP Statistics Mo pots enabled SN ste este ste ren mste este ste ren Unknown megar _No ports enabled CCC Auto refresh Ll Figure 4 7 15 STP Statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port 153 e MSTP e RSTP e STP e TCN e Discarded Unknown e Discarded Illegal User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port T
411. omatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 6 8 Private VLAN The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here Private VLANs can be added or deleted here Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here Private VLANs are based on the source port mask and there are no connections to VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets By default all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs The Private VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 6 appears Auto refresh LJ Private VLAN Membership Configuration pattepveas wo x2 3 5 7 0 9 ofa lalola pola pal 1 M HH MM EM ME MM MM Mm a Figure 4 6 6 Private VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields 119 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Object Description e Delete To delete a private VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next save e Private VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID To include a port in a Private VLAN check the box To remove
412. on reboot Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 304 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 15 Network Diagnostics This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot The diagnostic tools are designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers Use the Diagnastics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items Ping m IPv6 Ping Remote IP Ping E Cable Diagnostic PING The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues The Managed Switch transmit ICMP packets and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply Cable Diagnostics The Cable Diagnostics performing tests on copper cables These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted pair cabling There might be two statuses as follow m if the link is established on the twisted pair interface in 1000Base T mode the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer m ifthe link is established in 1
413. on type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 e Adding a new policy Click Add New Policy to add a new policy Specify the Application type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy Click Save The number of policies supported is 32 Port Policies Configuration Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration Object Description 297 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Port The port number for which the configuration applies e Policy ID The set of policies that shall apply for a given port The set of policies is selected by checkmarking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 14 4 LLDP MED Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP MED neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP MED Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 3 appears The columns hold the following information LLDP MED Neighbour Information Device Type Capabilities Endpoint Class Ill LLOP MED Capabilities Network Policy Extended Power via MOI PO Inve
414. one or the other reason the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear This button is available in the following modes e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X Click to clear the counters for the selected port Clear ALL This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth X Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client s counters The Last Client will not be cleared however Clear This This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth X 244 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Click to clear only the currently selected client s counters 4 11 6 Authentication Server Configuration This page allows you to configure the Authentication Servers The Authentication Server Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 7 appears Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration op seconds Dead Time Time 300 seconds RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration pa fs FF 0 A AAA A AA TACACS Authenticat
415. onfiguration screen in Figure 4 10 2 appears 207 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Access Control List Configuration Ingress Port Policy Bitmask Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Redirect Port Redirect Mirror Counter The page includes the following fields Object e Ingress Port e Policy Bitmask e Frame Type e Action e Rate Limiter e Port Redirect e Mirror e Counter Figure 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration page screenshot Description Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are All The ACE will match all ingress port Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the
416. ontains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name IP Address State Round Trip Time RFC4670 Name radiusAccClientExtRo und Trip Time 255 Description IP address and UDP port for the accounting server in question Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Response and the Request that matched it from the RADIUS accounting server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of O ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retesh Click to refresh the page immediat
417. ookup Voice VLAN OUI entry Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Lookup lt oui_addr gt 920 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx default Show OUI address Voice VLAN Port Mode Description Set or show the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Syntax Voice VLAN Port Mode lt port_list gt disable auto force Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disjoin from Voice VLAN auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached on the specific port and configure the Voice VLAN members automatically force Forced join to Voice VLAN default Show Voice VLAN port mode Default Setting disable Example Set auto mode for port 1 4 of Voice VLAN port mode WGSW 24040 gt voice vian port mode 1 4 auto Voice VLAN Security Description Set or show the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Syntax Voice VLAN Security lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters 921 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Voice VLAN security mode disable Disable Voice VLAN security mode default Show flow
418. oping Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently e Host Version Working Host Version currently e Querier Status Shows the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE DISABLE denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled e Querier Transmitted The number of Transmitted Querier e Querier Received The number of Received Querier e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports 171 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports e V1 Leave Received The number of Received V1 Leaves e Router Port Display which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port e Port Switch port number e Status Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears all Statistics counters et Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Auto refresh 4 8 12 MLD Group Information Entries in the MLD Group Table are shown on this page The MLD Group Table is sorted first by
419. opped Other Info IP Address 0 0 0 0 1012 State Disabled Round Trip Time 0 ms RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server 1 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Responses Requests Malformed Responses Retransmissions Bad Authenticators Pending Requests Unknown Types Timeouts Packets Dropped Other Into IP Address 0 0 0 0 1013 State Disabled Round Trip Time 0 ms Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 11 9 RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Servers The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS authentication server packet counter There are seven receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4668 Name Description Rx Access radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS Accepts ccessAccepts Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from the server 250 Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Access Rejects Access Challenges Malformed Access Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped 201 radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRejects radiusAuthClientExtA ccessChallenges radiusAuthClientExt MalformedAccessRe sponses radiusAuthClientExtB adAuthentic
420. or for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 e Auto negotiation Auto negotiation identifies if MAC PHY auto negotiation is supported by the link partner e Auto negotiation Auto negotiation status identifies if auto negotiation is currently enabled at the status link partner If Auto negotiation is supported and Auto negotiation status is disabled the 802 3 PMD operating mode will be determined the operational MAU type field value rather than by auto negotiation e Auto negotiation Auto negotiation Capabilities shows the link partners MAC PHY capabilities Capabilities Buttons Retesh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 14 5 Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 4 appears 301 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R LLDP Neighbour Information Local Port Chassis ID Remote Port ID System Name Port Description System Capabilities Management Address Mo LLDP neighbour information found Auto refresh Dl Figure 4 14 4 LLDP Neighbor Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Local Port e Chassis ID e Remote Port
421. or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions For example the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection IEEE 802 1X IGMP IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gaming and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these USES IGMP Querier IMAP A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages 963 IPMC User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R from a mail server
422. ort list or all default All ports untagged VLAN Link Type Tagged tagged VLAN Link Type Untagged default Show VLAN link type Default Setting Un tagged Example Enable tagged frame for port2 WGSW 24040 gt vlan linktype 2 tagged VLAN Q in Q Mode Description Set or show the port Q in Q mode Syntax VLAN QinQ lt port_list gt disable man customer Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disable Q in Q VLAN Mode man Q in Q MAN Port Mode customer Q in Q Customer Port Mode default Show VLAN QinQ Mode 371 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Set port2 in man port WGSW 24040 gt vlan ging 2 man VLAN Ethernet Type Description Set or show out layer VLAN tag ether type in Q in Q VLAN mode Syntax VLAN Ethtype lt port_list gt man dot1q Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports man Set out layer VLAN tag ether type MAN dot1q Set out layer VLAN tag ether type 802 1Q default Show VLAN out layer VLAN tag ether type Default Setting N A Example Set out layer VLAN tag Ethernet type for port 10 in man Ethernet type WGSW 24040 gt vlan ethtype 10 man VLAN Add Description Add or modify VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Add lt vid gt lt name gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name lt port_list gt Port list or al
423. ort_list gt enable disable rx tx Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LLDP reception and transmission disable Disable LLDP rx Enable LLDP reception only tx Enable LLDP transmission only default Show LLDP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable port1 LLDP function WGSW 24040 gt lldp mode 1 enable LLDP Optional TLV Description Show or Set LLDP Optional TLVs Syntax LLDP Optional_ TLV lt port_list gt port_descr sys namelsys descr sys capalmgmt_addr enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports port_descr Description of the port sysm_name System name sys_descr Description of the system sys_capa System capabilities mgmt_addr Master s IP address default Show optional TLV s configuration enable Enables TLV disable Disable TLV default Show optional TLV s configuration Default Setting Description of the port Enable System name Enable Description of the system Enable 473 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R System capabilities Enable Master s IP address Enable Example Disable description of the port for port1 WGSW 24
424. ot an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both usernam
425. ot switch E The path cost to the root from the transmitting port m The port identifier of the transmitting port 136 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU ana if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following E One switch is elected as the root switch E The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch m A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root a A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch a Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switc
426. ow HTTPs configuration WGSW 24040 gt security switch https configuration HTTPS Configuration HTTPS Mode Enable HTTPS Redirect Mode Disabled Security Switch HTTPs Mode Description Set or show the HTTPS mode Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable HTTPs disable Disable HTTPs default Show HTTPs mode Default Setting enable Example Enable HTTPs function User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security switch https mode enable 387 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Switch HTTPs Redirect Description Set or show the HTTPS redirect mode Automatic redirect web browser to HTTPS during HTTPS mode enabled Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Redirect enable disable Parameters enable Enable HTTPs redirect disable Disable HTTPs redirect default Show HTTPs redirect mode Default Setting disable Example Enable HTTPs redirect function WGSW 24040 gt security switch https redirect enable Security Switch Access Configuration Description Show access management configuration Syntax Security Switch Access Configuration Example Show access management configuration WGSW 24040 gt security switch access configuration Access Mgmt Configuration System Access Mode Disabled W WEB HTTPS 388 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R End IP Address Security Swit
427. p group lookup Idx Model Security Name Group Name 406 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R default_ro_group private default_rw_group v2c public default_ro_group v2c private default_rw_group usm default_user default_rw_group Number of entries 5 Security Switch SNMP View Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 view entry The entry index key are lt view_name gt and lt oid_subtree gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Add lt view_name gt included excluded lt oid_subtree gt Parameters lt view_name gt A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should excluded lt oid_subtree gt The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view Example Add SNMPv3 view entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp view add snmpv3_ view include 1 Security Switch SNMP View Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 view entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Delete lt index gt 407 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 view entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp view delete 3 Security Switch SNMP View Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 vi
428. packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 to 127 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 to 255 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 to 511 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 to 1023 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 to 1588 octets in length 333 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds ke Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 334 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 5 1 Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system
429. ping VLAN Configuration The page includes the following fields Buttons Figure 4 8 6 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page screenshot Object e VLANID e IGMP Snooping Enable e IGMP Querier e Compatibility e QRI e LLQI LMAI for IGMP e URI Description The VLAN ID of the entry Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is IGMP Auto Forced IGMPv1 Forced IGMPv2 Forced IGMPv3 default compatibility value is IGMP Auto Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The
430. plex mode selection Flow Control disable enable Display each port s speed duplex mode link status Flow control status Auto negotiation status trunk status TX RX Both Many to 1 monitor VLAN 802 1Q Tagged Based VLAN up to 256 VLAN groups 27 Port Mirroring User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Q in Q tunneling Private VLAN Edge PVE MAC Based VLAN Protocol Based VLAN Voice VLAN MVR Multicast VLAN Registration Up to 255 VLAN groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs IEEE 802 3ad LACP Static Trunk Link Aggregation Support 12 groups of 16 Port trunk support Traffic classification based Strict priority and WRR 8 Level priority for switching Port Number 802 1p priority 802 1Q VLAN tag DSCP TOS field in IP Packet IGMP v1 v2 v3 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups IGMP Snooping IGMP Querier mode support MLD v1 v2 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups MLD Snooping MLD Querier mode support IP Based ACL MAC Based ACL Access Control List Standards Conformance Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE IEEE 802 3 10Base T Up to 256 entries RFC 1213 MIB II IF MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 2863 Interface MIB RFC 2665 Ether Like MIB RFC 2819 RMON MIB Group 1 2 3 and 9 RFC 2737 Entity MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB RFC 2933 IGMP STD MIB RFC 3411 SNMP Frameworks MIB IEEE 802 1X PAE LLDP MAU MIB IEEE 802 3u 100Base TX 100Base F
431. po joo repo User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Qos Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers Port 1 Enable rate unit a7 Figure 4 9 6 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Schedule Mode e Queue Shaper Enable e Queue Shaper Rate e Queue Shaper Unit e Queue Shaper Excess e Queue Scheduler Weight e Queue Scheduler Percent e Port Shaper Enable e Port Shaper Rate Description Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is 500 This value is 1
432. port When loading this file only the included parameters will be changed This means that the age time will be set to 200 and the learn mode will be set to automatic Save Configuration 1 Press the Save Configuration button to save the current configuration in manager workstation The following screens in Figure 4 2 22 amp 4 2 23 appear 71 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R File Download Do you want to open or save this file Name ntent length 18058Server_ PLANET Web Server Type XML Document 17 666 From 192 168 0 100 While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially harm your computer IF you do not trust the source do not open or save this file Whats the risk Figure 4 2 22 File Download screen 2 Chose the file save path in management workstation Save As Save in O Config Backup wt e y gt EEE biy A ecert Documents Hy O ocuments a n f My Computer A biy N etwork File name OO Save as type All Files 4 Lancel Figure 4 2 23 File save screen 4 2 18 Configuration Upload This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The 12 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Configuration Upload screen in Figure 4 2 24 appears Configuration Upload Browse Uplead Bose Figure 4 2 24 Configuration Upload page screenshot Configuration Upload 1 Cli
433. port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The Port Security Status screen in Figure 4 12 6 appears Port Security Switch Status User Module Legend User Module Name abbr Limit Control 002 1 DHCP Snooping Voice WLAN Port Status MAC Count Count Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled PISA IE Ory 0 Oo Ds am Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 12 6 Port Security Status screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields User Module Legend The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services 272 Object e User Module Name e Abbr Port Status User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Description The full name of a module that may request Port Security services A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in th
434. ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging 109 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MM VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame WE Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate
435. privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls There are 3 web pages associated with the manual ACL configuration ACL Access Control List The web page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way highest top to lowest bottom Default the table is empty An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs The first matching ACE will take action permit deny on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented An ACE can be associated with a Policy 1 ingress port or any ingress port the whole switch If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under the Ports web page There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE Read the Web page help text to get further information for each of them The maximum number of ACEs is 64 ACL Ports The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules Traffic Policy is created
436. ption Set or show the action involved with exceeding the limit Syntax Security Network Limit Action lt port_list gt none trap shut trap shut Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports none trap shut trap_ shut Action to be taken in case the number of MAC addresses exceeds the limit none Don t do anything trap Send an SNMP trap shut Shutdown the port trap_shut Send an SNMP trap and shutdown the port default Show current action Default Setting none 419 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Set trap mode for limit action for port 1 WGSW 24040 gt security network limit action 1 trap Security Network Limit Reopen Description Reopen one or more ports whose limit is exceeded and shut down Syntax Security Network Limit Reopen lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Reopen port 1 WGSW 24040 gt security network limit reopen 1 Security Network NAS Configuration Description Show 802 1X configuration Syntax Security Network NAS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show 802 1X configuration of port 1 WGSW 24040 gt security network nas configuration 1 802 1X Configuration 420 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Disabled Disabled Reauth Period 3600 EAPO
437. quest OTP RADIUS Access Challenge EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept Port Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized Figure 4 11 2 EAP message exchange 225 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R a Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state
438. r LLDP will restart auto detect process Possible discovery protocols are OUI Detect telephony device by OUI address LLDP Detect telephony device by LLDP Both Both OUI and LLDP Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 1 Voice VLAN OUI Table Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this page The maximum entry number is 16 Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 9 20 appears 204 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Voice VLAN OUI Table 00 30 4f PLANET phones 00 03 6b Cisco phones 00 01 82 Hal phones 00 60 13 Philips and NEC AG phones 00 d0 1e Fingtel phones 00 e0 5 Polycom phones 00 e0 Ebo 3Lom phones 00 01 83 siemens Als phones Figure 4 9 20 Voice VLAN OUI Table page screenshot d d E L LI d d The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Telephony OUI An telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description The description of OUI address Normally it describes which vendor telephony device it belongs to The allowed string length is 0 to 32 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new access managem
439. r VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Hardware Filter Switch Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv4 address could be handled by chip or not Buttons Auto refresh L Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately k Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 8 8 MLD Snooping Configuration This page provides MLD Snooping related configuration The MLD Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 11 appears 166 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MLD Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMMCy6 Flooding Enabled MLD SSM Range Be Leave Proxy Enabled Proxy Enabled Port Related Configuration Router Port Throttling 4 il MA E a a ME PE ME lt Figure 4 8 11 MLD Snooping Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Enabled Enable the Global MLD Snooping e Unre
440. r of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal 323 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Community Specify the community when trap is sent the string length is from 0 to 127 default is public e Event Last Time Indicates the value of sysUpTime at the time this event entry last generated an event Buttons Add Neve Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 18 5 RMON Event Detail This page provides an overview of RMON event entries screen in Figure 4 18 5 appears Detailed RMON Event ID Auto refresh d Loglime LogDescription Figure 4 18 5 Detailed RMON Event ID page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Event Index Indicates the index of the event entry e Log Index Indicates the index of the log entry e LogTime Indicates Event log time e LogDescription Indicates the Event description Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 324 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 18 6 RMON Event Status This page provides an overview of RMON Event table entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Event table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first vi
441. racket to the opposite side Step5 After the brackets are attached to the Managed Switch use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack as shown in Figure 2 9 0080000 4 1088000 Figure 2 9 Mounting Managed Switch in a Rack Step6 Proceeds with the steps 4 and steps 5 of session 2 2 1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply power to the Managed Switch 35 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 2 2 3 Installing the SFP transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the Managed Switch As the Figure 2 10 appears MGB SX LX yy 1000Base SX LX E LC Fiber ES ES Figure 2 10 Plug in the SFP transceiver E Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers PLANET Managed Switch supports both Single mode and Multi mode SFP transceiver The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication Gigabit SFP Transceiver modules MGB GT MGB SX MGB LX MGB L50 MGB L70 MGB L120 MGB LA10 MGB LA20 MGB LB20 MGB LA40 MGB LB40 SFP Port 1000Base T Module SFP Port 1000Base SX mini GBIC module SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 50KM SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 70KM SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 120KM
442. range is 14 to 200 bytes with default being 128 bytes If the maximum datagram size does not take into account the maximum header size samples may be dropped e Counter Poller Enables disables counter polling on this port Enabled e Counter Poller Interval With counter polling enabled this specifies the interval in seconds between counter poller samples ww Cc 3 Oo ch See description under Owner Click to refresh the page Note that unsaved changes will be lost Save Click to save changes Note that sFlow configuration is not persisted to non volatile memory Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 17 2 sFlow Status This page shows receiver and per port sFlow statistics screen in Figure 4 17 2 appears 316 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R sFlow Statistics Recelver Statistics Owner lt none gt IP Address Hostname Timeout Tx Successes Tx Errors Flow Samples Counter Samples Port Statistics 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 17 2 sFlow Statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Receiver Statistics Object Description e Owner This field shows the current owner of the sFlow configuration It assumes one of three values as follows e If sFlow is currently unconfigured unclaimed Owner contains lt none gt e If sFlow is currently configured through Web or CLI Owner contains lt Configur
443. ranslation 1 10 enable QoS Port DSCP Classification Description Set or show DSCP classification based on QoS class This enables per port to map new DSCP value based on QoS class Syntax QoS Port DSCP Classification lt port_list gt none zero selected all Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports none No DSCP ingress classification zero Classify DSCP if DSCP 0 selected Classify DSCP for which class mode is enable all Classify all DSCP default Show port DSCP ingress classification mode Default Setting none Example Set DSCP classification based on QoS class and DP level in zero WGSW 24040 gt QoS Port DSCP Classification 1 10 zero 494 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark Description Set or show the port DSCP remarking mode Syntax QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark lt port_list gt disable enable remap Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disable DSCP egress rewrite enable Enable DSCP egress rewrite with the value received from analyzer remap Rewrite DSCP in egress frame with remapped DSCP default Show port DSCP egress remarking mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DSCP egress rewrite WGSW 24040 gt QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark 1 10 enable QoS DSCP Map Description Set or show DSCP mapping table This table is used to map QoS class and DP level
444. ransmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease The number of lease unassigned option 53 with value 11 packets received and Unassigned transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and Unknown transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and Active transmitted Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for the selected port 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host This page provides IP Source Guard related configuration The IP Source Guard Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 10 appears 217 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R IP Source Guard Configuration Mode Diei Y Port Mode Configuration Port Mode Max Dynamic Clients Tiisabled Unlimited 4 44 1 441 4 4 Mee Ww Pd 4 Disabled Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unliraitec Disabled
445. ration below applies e QoS Class Controls the default QoS class e the QoS class for frames not classified in any other way There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority 183 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority Note If the QoS class has been dynamically changed then the actual QoS class is shown in parentheses after the configured QoS class e DP Level Controls the default Drop Precedence Level i e the DP level for frames not classified in any other way e PCP Controls the default PCP for untagged frames e DEI Controls the default DEI for untagged frames e Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and or mapping e DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 4 Port Scheduler This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports The Port Scheduler screen in Figure 4 9 4 appears 184 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R QoS Egress Port Schedulers Weight jai o2 es os as M3 E Oo ha strict Priority strict Priority str
446. rding of frames If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 65535 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauth
447. re traps Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap authentication failure Disabled Disable SNMP trap authentication failure Indicates the SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 0 to 2147 Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is 0 to 255 Indicates the SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Possible values are Enabled Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed When Trap Probe Security Engine ID is enabled the ID will be probed automatically Otherwise the ID specified in this field is used The 80 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed e Trap Security Name Indicates the SNMP trap security name
448. ress WGSW 24H40R gt m GS 2 4646R 4 4 14116118 281242 1241 E 4 JA ee i23 AH 4 338 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 Command Line Mode The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the nature of the command A sample of the CLI command modes are described below Each of the command modes supports specific software commands Command Groups System System settings and reset options IP IP configuration and Ping Port Port management MAC MAC address table VLAN Virtual LAN PVLAN Private VLAN Security Security management STP Spanning Tree Protocol Aggr Link Aggregation LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDPMED Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media QoS Quality of Service Mirror Port mirroring Config Load Save of configuration via TFTP Firmware Download of firmware via TFTP UPnP Universal Plug and Play MVR Multicast VLAN Registration Voice VLAN Specific VLAN for voice traffic Loop Protection Loop Protection IPMC MLD IGMP Snooping VLC VLAN Control List SMTP SMTP Control Configure 6 1 System Command System Configuration Description Show system configuration 339 Syntax System Configuration all port lt port_list gt User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW
449. reviously saved values 4 16 2 Loop Protection Status This page displays the loop protection port status the ports of the switch screen in Figure 4 16 2 appears Loop Protection Status Auto refresh LJ No ports enabled OOOO Mo ports enabled Figure 4 16 2 Loop protection status screenshot 312 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Action The currently configured port action e Transmit The currently configured port transmit mode e Loops The number of loops detected on this port e Status The current loop protection status of the port e Loop Whether a loop is currently detected on the port e Time of Last Loop The time of the last loop event detected Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 17 sFlow The sFlow RFC 3176 is a protocol based on standard network export and used on monitoring the network traffic information developed by the InMon Company The monitored switch or router sends date to the client analyzer through its main operations such as sampling and statistic then the analyzer will analyze according to the user requirements so to monitor the network A sFlow monitor system includes sFlow proxy central data collector and sFlow analyzer The sFlow proxy collects data from the swit
450. riPHY Cable Diagnostics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair OK Correctly terminated pair Open Open pair Short Shorted pair 309 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Short A Cross pair short to pair A Short B Cross pair short to pair B Short C Cross pair short to pair C Short D Cross pair short to pair D Cross A Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair A Cross B Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair B Cross C Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair C Cross D Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair D Length The length in meters of the cable pair The resolution is 3 meters Buttons Start Click to run the diagnostics 310 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 16 Loop Protection This chapter describes enabling loop protection function that provides loop protection to prevent broadcast loops in WGSW 24040 4 16 1 Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations and possibly change them as well screen in Figure 4 16 1 appears General Settings Global Configuration Enable Loop Protection Port Configuration Port Enabie action Tx Mode Ae w lt Ab gt y Shutdown Port Shutdown Fort iil lt a Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Ena
451. rity AAA Timeout lt timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt Server response timeout 3 3600 seconds default Show server timeout configuration Default Setting 15 Example Set 30sec for server timeout User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security aaa timeout 30 446 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security AAA Deadtime Description Set or show server dead time Syntax Security AAA Deadtime lt dead_time gt Parameters lt dead_time gt Time that a server is considered dead if it doesn t answer a request 0 3600 seconds default Show server dead time configuration Default Setting 300 Example Set 1000sec for server dead time WGSW 24040 gt security aaa deadtime 1000 Security AAA RADIUS Description Set or show RADIUS authentication server setup Syntax Security AAA RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show RADIUS authentication server configuration enable Enable RADIUS authentication server disable Disable RADIUS authentication server default Show RADIUS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external authentication server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in t
452. rity Network NAS Authenticate lt port_list gt now Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports now Force reauthentication immediately default Schedule a reauthentication Example Start NAS authentication now for port 1 WGSW 24040 gt security network nas authenticate 1 now Security Network NAS Statistics Description Show or clear 802 1X statistics Syntax Security Network NAS Statistics lt port_list gt clear eapol radius 427 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear statistics eapol Show EAPOL statistics radius Show Backend Server statistics default Show all statistics Example Show 802 1X statistics in port 1 WGSW 24040 gt security network nas statistics 1 Rx Total 0 Tx Total Rx Response ld O Tx Request ld Rx Response O Tx Request Rx Start Rx Logoff Rx Invalid Type Rx Invalid Length Port 1 Backend Server Statistics Rx Access Challenges O Tx Responses Rx Other Requests Rx Auth Successes Rx Auth Failures Security Network ACL Configuration Description Show ACL Configuration Syntax Security Network ACL Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 428 Security Network ACL Action Description User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Set or s
453. rk ARP Inspection Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable ARP Inspection disable Disable ARP Inspection Default Setting disable Example Enable ARP inspection mode User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security network arp inspection mode enable Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode Description Set or show the ARP Inspection port mode Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable ARP Inspection port disable Disable ARP Inspection port default Show ARP Inspection port mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable the ARP inspection mode of port 1 443 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security network arp inspection port mode 1 Security Network ARP Inspection Entry Description Add or delete ARP inspection static entry Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_mac gt lt allowed_ip gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port ARP inspection static entry delete Delete existing port ARP inspection static entry lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt allowed_mac gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX X is a hexadecimal digit MAC address allowed for doing
454. rnnnnancnns 442 Security Network ARP Inspection Mode ccccccccseeceeceeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeesaeseeeseeeeeesaeeeessaeeeesaeeeesseeeeeas 443 Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode cccooocccccocconoconcnconoconoconconononnnnonononnonncnnonnncnnonannnnnnnrnnoroncnnonananess 443 Security Network ARP Inspection Entry cccccsseccccesececceseeeccessecceececseececsueeeseeseeessueeessegeeessseesseuesessneeesas 444 Security Network ARP Inspection Status sosie sekade e a r a aaa aa ara Aa 444 Security Network ARP Inspection Translation ooooccccoocnnncnoncnnononononnncnnonnncnnononononnnnnnonnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnns 445 SECU ARAC ONIU A ol a o ede 445 SECUIVAAA TIMEOUT esmis a a rd a a ie 446 SECUMILY AAA DeadtiME e e 447 Security AAA RADIOS a ia 447 13 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security AAA ACG T TRADI Spe o e al a nO 448 O OS AAA ee ee E A A 448 A A ata ulcus ae uate 449 6 8 Spanning Tree Protocol Command sssusa dl a idas 450 MR A Oa 450 STEVENS A nanan eeresiaeneiake 450 STP T Hold si A AE 451 AMAS e labio coordenadas 451 A A A ee Wn oR Cee a een Pk ae ee eee eee me ee Pe ene eo ee 452 SN o 452 TRONO A a 453 A A A 453 o 1g 5 eeetmerneee ee me eer er eet E Or lk om eee es IO ee em Oe eee eee 454 DTP RECOV GY A A A AAA AE 454 SIP li NA A A evarin eons 455 A te oeitea denen glace de aeateecnasiGaeede sate ceeaueneind uaueescnsaeeaeesaueasoneanaite 455 A A eM
455. roadcast frames disable Disable storm policing of broadcast frames lt rate gt Rate in kbps or fps 100 13200000 kbps Unit is kilo bits per second fps Unit is frames per second Default Setting disable Example Enable multicast storm control in 2kbps WGSW 24040 gt QoS Port Storm multicast enable 2 QoS Port Storm Broadcast Description Set or show the broadcast storm rate limiter The limiter will only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present in the MAC Address table Syntax QoS Storm Broadcast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable broadcast storm control disable Disable broadcast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in fps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 32768k Default Setting disable 499 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R QoS QCL Add Description Add or modify QoS Control Entry QCE If the QCE ID parameter lt qce_id gt is specified and an entry with this QCE ID already exists the QCE will be modified Otherwise a new QCE will be added If the QCE ID is not specified the next available QCE ID will be used If the next QCE ID parameter lt qce_id_next gt is specified the QCE will be placed before this QCE in the list If the next QCE ID is not specified and if it is a new entry added the QCE will be placed last in the list Otherwise if the next QCE ID is not specified and if existing QCE is m
456. rotocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources Every incoming frame is classified to a QoS class which is used throughout the device for providing queuing scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority R RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP 569 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication It is a OAM functionallity that is used by a MEP to indicate defect detected to the remote peer MEP A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch
457. rror Recovery Timeout Figure 4 7 7 STP Bridge Configuration page screenshot 142 The page includes the following fields Basic Settings Object e Protocol Version e Bridge Priority e Forward Delay e Max Age e Maximum Hop Count e Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Object e Edge Port BPDU Filtering e Edge Port BPDU Guard e Port Error Recovery User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Description The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how
458. rs can use the attached RS 232 cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device After the connection users an run any terminal emulation program Hyper Terminal ProComm Plus Telix Winterm and so on to enter the startup screen of the device 2 1 2 LED Indications The front panel LEDs indicates instant status of port links data activity and system power helps monitor and troubleshoot when needed Figure 2 3 shows the LED indications of these Managed Switches WGSW 24040 24040R LED indication PLANET WOSWW 24040 24 Port Gigabit Managed Switch Figure 2 3 WGSW 24040 24040R LED for Front Panel Color Function O PWR Green Lights to indicate that the Switch has power M Per 10 100 1000Mbps Port LED Function 1000 Lights to indicate the port is running in 1000Mbps speed and successfully established LNK ACT Blink indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 31 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 10 100 Lights to indicate the port is running in 10 100Mbps speed and successfully established LNK ACT Blink indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Function Lights to indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps Off to indicate the port is operating at 100Mbps or no link Lights to indicate the port is successfully established LNK ACT Orange Blink indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiv
459. s Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 7 MSTI Ports Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well A MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are stack global The MSTI Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 12 amp Figure 4 7 13appears MSTI Port Configuration select MSTI Figure 4 7 12 MSTI Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields 150 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MSTI Port Configuration Object Description e Select MSTI Select the bridge instance and set more detail configuration MST1 MSTI Port Configuration MSTI Aggregated Ports Configuration MSTI Normal Ports Configuration wt 4 i ie AAT A AA 4 Figure 4 7 13 MST1 MSTI Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields MSTx MSTI Port Configuration Object Description User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port e Path Cost Controls the path cost inc
460. s 288 4 14 1Link Layer Discovery PROTOCOL rsrsr A A 288 AMA CONGU HON con eiie a E E E E A E E E A 288 A143 LEDP MEDC OMlGUlAUOMN csi ar ina a a N 292 4 14 4 LLDP MED Ne ghbor tii di A ee ee ee 298 AA ONCE ION DO far aia 301 pa PON A A O O e cmc ait ais acs ua dee louseaaanledl N 303 419 Network DIAGMOSIICS sia 305 E A A E alee ecco tetas 305 ln ce See oe T eee ee ee eee 306 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping ill CS basta A A ida 307 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Ao CADIS DIAGMOSUCS ac a ot e e a de o a sh a eS 308 4 16 LOOP Protection sr els acetal ceesiai ecw rn areetewnees acestiecesels eee wccin ieee 311 AA GV GOA AGUA ON A alee vaste nO oe ee 311 Asle Z OOD Protecuon Sta lUStanis ii idolo coa 312 BVT STOW cc dada race a ia ai io 313 ATTSFlOWCONTQUIQUION causaron ocio olsaza 314 A OW A a rte atts wet e le vealed e wert adie ee oat et Pete na Rape Pann at octet 316 ATO RMON roinne cet een i ct calc seer aa Rea eaten esti ened tees datitetes 319 ATO WaRMON Alarm COMMOUPALON a eat ckdae ta seek vied maineiaa sce woainchiteta yonceeas dadeeeee sean eoreeee eee 319 418 2 RMON Alarm Detalla iS A Madan aceasta 321 A 83 RAMONA Mota aia aiii esas 322 4 18 4 RMON Event Configuration 000 ves ence ieededodccsabesectedek Secdeseens oyeees daeseseecepees eens 323 AAS RMON EVE At Detalla id 324 418 0 RMON Event Stee AAA A A AA AA SAA AA 325 A TS RMON EistoryContiqguradl OM cite case ces naa a a a N tones 325 416 9 RMON History Detail sari
461. s ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Add SNMPv3 access entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp access add group_snmpv3 usm authpriv snmpv3_view snmpv3_view Security Switch SNMP Access Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 access entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 access entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp access delete 3 409 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Switch SNMP Access Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 access entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 access entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch snmp access lookup Idx Group Name Model Level default_ro_group any NodAuth NoPriv 2 default_rw_group any NodAuth NoPriv Number of entries 2 Security Switch RMON Statistics Add Description Add or modify RMON Statistics entry The entry index key is lt stats_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON Statistics Add lt stats_id gt lt data_source gt Parameters lt stats_id gt Statistics ID 1 65535 lt data_source gt The OID that indicates that the iflndex in ifEntry The value should be like 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 xxx Security Switch RMON Statistics Delete Description Delete RMON Statistics entry The entry index key is lt stats_id gt
462. s Gigabit Ethernet Switched with SFP fiber optical connective ability and robust layer 2 features the description of these models as below WGSW 24040 amp 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T with 4 Shared SFP Managed Gigabit Switch WGSW 24040R 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T with 4 Shared SFP Managed Gigabit Switch Redundant Power Terms of Managed Switch means the Switches mentioned titled in the cover page of this User s manual e WGSW 24040 24040R 1 1 Packet Contents Open the box of the Managed Switch and carefully unpack it The box should contain the following items Check the contents of your package for following parts M The Managed Switch x1 M User s Manual CD x1 M Quick Installation Guide x1 M Rack Mount Accessory Kit x1 M Power Cord x1 M RubberFeet X4 M RS 232 DB9 Male Console Cable x1 M SFP Dust Caps X8 If any of these are missing or damaged please contact your dealer immediately if possible retain the carton including the original packing material and use them against to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair 1 2 Product Description Cost effective IPv6 Managed Gigabit Switch solution for SMB Nowadays lots of electronic products or mobile devices can browse the Internet which means the need of IP Address increases However the current IPv4 network infrastructure is not capable enough to provide IP Address to each single users Clients The situation forces the ISP to build
463. s Overview page screenshot 332 The page includes the following fields Buttons Object ID Data Source iflndex Drop Octets Pkts Broad cast Multi cast CRC Errors Under size Over size Frag Jabb Coll 64 65 127 128 255 256 511 512 1023 1024 1588 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Description Indicates the index of Statistics entry The port ID which wants to be monitored The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The total number of
464. s as shown below 223 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Authentication server RADIUS Server Authentication server TACACS Server Internet Intranet Authenticator A PLANET 802 1X aware Switch C Supplicant Client with 802 1X authentication Figure 4 11 1 Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the auth
465. s assigned to this aggregation ID e Last changed The time since this aggregation changed e Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch stack The format is Switch ID Port 102 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh i Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 4 5 4 LACP Port Status This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports The LACP Port Status screen in Figure 4 5 6 appears LACP Status Partner Partner Partner Mo Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 5 6 LACP Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile it s LACP status is disabled e Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group 103 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Partner System ID The partner s System ID MAC address e Partner Port The partner s port number connected to this port e Partner Priority The partner s port priority Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately
466. s box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values 1 Ethernet 2 LLC 3 SNAP Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will 132 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R vary depending on the new frame type you selected e Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types 1 For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600 Oxffff 2 For LLC Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 Oxff b SSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff 3 For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub values a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is value in format of XX XX Xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from Ox00 Oxff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be et
467. s page The entry index keys are Engine ID and User Name The SNMPv3 Users screen in Figure 4 3 5 appears SNMPv3 User Configuration Delete User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Mame Level Protocol Password Protocol Password OUOOUFeSO1 000004 default user NoAuth NoPriv More None Mone None Figure 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Users Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Delete e Engine ID e User Name e Security Level e Authentication Protocol Description Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User based Security Model USM for message security and the View based Access Control Model VACM for access control For the USM entry the usmUserEnginelD and usmUserName are the entry s keys In a simple agent usmUserEnginelD is always that agent s own snmpEnginelD value The value can also take the value of the snmpEnginelD of a remote SNMP engine with which this user can communicate In other words if user engine ID equal system engine ID then it is local user otherwise it s remote user A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string len
468. s the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 169 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 8 10 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The MLD filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and MLD throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join MLD filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port A MLD filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled MLD join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the MLD join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the MLD join report is dropped MLD throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to d
469. sabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Security Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Discovery Protocol Voice VLAN Mode Description Set or show the Voice VLAN mode We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Syntax Voice VLAN Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable Voice VLAN mode disable Disable Voice VLAN mode default Show flow Voice VLAN mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the Voice VLAN mode WGSW 24040 gt voice vlan mode enable 917 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Voice VLAN ID Description Set or show Voice VLAN ID Syntax Voice VLAN ID lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Default Setting 1000 Example Set ID 2 for Voice VLAN ID WGSW 24040 gt voice vlan id 2 Voice VLAN Agetime Description Set or show Voice VLAN age time Syntax Voice VLAN Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 10 10000000 default Show age time Default Setting 86400sec Example Set Voice VLAN age time in 100sec WGSW 24040 gt voice valn agetime 100 918 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Voice VLAN Traffic Class Description Set or show Voice VLAN ID Synta
470. sari a e eaa a el aed ba aioe A E Pe Deine ge adn EAEN Aa 326 ATE DRMON HISO Salu Sna A AA se eteet eee 328 AG TORMON Statistics Coniguratom nosten A A en dance 329 ANSAT ERMON Staustics Dell danes 330 4 1812 NS OE 332 5 COMMAND LINE INFTERPAGE ccuviicuciacaiaioncnacanaisasiaaneala coa neisnanninheianeacancisdaiecanaaaRianandis 335 DA ACCESSING ME da 335 Logonrto the o e Se es ee ee ee eE UU 335 CONMOUNE INE address da le odo o lan al a tee 336 5 2 TEMNE LOMA aretha Seeeuba ee node hie 337 5 Command Line MOG sssi e aA E a EA 339 0 1 SY SIEM COMME A EEA NR 339 ii io A 339 System Log Configuration eee a ee iter nat Gace ec eee ete 340 A 341 System Log Server Mode ura cli 341 So A A ne ere 342 Se sd ce eae sg eee teas ced sas cb eee Seeds accu hase see ee caeetias 342 System Log Seven Address errantes ir toa aaabd 343 System Location A A A elutes 343 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R System Log Level a e e a en o a o o an o 344 System pr A ae ee La ee eee 344 SV Stem LOF OOK UD desist caer eaten a mets toons eaten Steal aad ila patent atic ats basletteed bals 345 System LOG CICA enue eee am te ie eee II ee eo 345 O ee eer ne re ere ee 346 System Restore Detalle aaa nies es 346 CM A qn o eee en ee ee 347 02 IP COMME A AAA 348 E zerei ce cee eda nc pct nce ina lentade aa See sat a a sedated acess 348 O A ne ee iy ee Re eC Eee ee Pe ety ee ee eae Cee aver 349 A ee coe eno eee 349 A O ebaea nama tees 350 PEN SS ree ee o
471. screen in Figure 4 14 5 appears LLDP Global Counters Global Counters Neighbour entries were last changed 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 00 00 00 23751 sec ago Total Neighbours Entries Added O Total Neighbours Entries Deleted U Total Neighbours Entries Dropped U Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out O LLDP Statistics Local Counters Local Port Tx Frames Rx Frames Rx Errors Frames Discarded TLYs Discarded TLYs Unrecognized Org Discarded Age Outs a a a O O O O O O O O O O O O Auto refresh L Figure 4 14 5 LLDP Statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Global Counters Object Description e Neighbor entries were lt also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added It also last changed shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected e Total Neighbors Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot Entries Added e Total Neighbors Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot Entries Deleted e Total Neighbors Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full Entries Dropped e Total Neighbors Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Entries Aged Out 303 Local Counters User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information Object Buttons Retresh Loca
472. se For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section Note that clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost Click to refresh the page Note that non committed changes will be lost Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 267 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 12 2 Access Management Configure access management table on this page The maximum entry number is 16 If the application s type match any one of the access management entries it will allow access to the switch The Access Management Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 2 appears Access Management Configuration m Delete Start IP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Add Hew Enty Figure 4 12 2 Access Management Configuration Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable access management mode operation Disabled Disable access management mode operation e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Start IP address Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry e End IP address Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry e HTTP HTTPS Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS i
473. sed VAN Ai a lada 545 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete c ccccccecececececececececececececececenececececeteueteneceteneteueuetenenenetetetenetenenenenenenenenes 545 VCL Protocol based VLAN Configurationuc ca eae cee DANE oe Ek eee 546 VCLIP based VLAN Configurati n acasa a ee le 546 VOl P pa WAIN ACG esse tater ts dee 546 VCL IP based VLAN Delete ccccccccccecececececececececececececececececececeueceneauauauaeaeaeneaeaeauaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeataeaeaeaeataeneaentags 547 6 24 SM EP COMA da lid 548 SIM TIP GOMMGUMAT Mus di 548 o A II O nO ee Pv Ree a eer et 548 A 548 A A A 549 NICD UA e A AS 549 SMTF AUN ISS ii a a eee 549 SMTP E E AEE IE hese a cs EE A E E ETEN EE AEE EE PE tiene EE EA AN 550 SMTP Mail UDI ls nic 550 MTM o e o o e A T 550 SN O a a a To e ue O 550 TEMITA OPERA TION lt a 552 1 AGaress Val inona a a 552 TLCAN irei aaa aa a a aaa aE aaa a aaaea a 552 7 3 F rwarding Gr FINETING a io 552 TA STO re and FOWA TA AAA AA R AAA AKANE 552 TO AUto N gotatlon A ie i a 553 SB TROUBLE SHOOTIN Ganan 554 APPENDE NX A ee ec ee ene eae ee aS ee een ee aoe eee ee se eee eee 556 AA Switch s RdJ 45 PIN ASSIGNMENTS sasaa aa aaa 556 A 2 10 100Mpp5 10 100B4 S T Xiana AAA n 556 19 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R APPENDED GLOSSAR Vcc n E E 558 20 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 1 INTRODUTION The PLANET Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Switch series WSGW switch are all multiple port
474. ser s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R APPENDEX A A 1 Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base T 1 BI_DA BI_DB 2 BI_DA BI_DB 3 BI_DB BI_DA 4 BI_DC BI_DD 5 BI_DC BI_DD 6 BI_DB BI_DA 7 BI_DD BI_DC 8 BI_DD BI_DC Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 2 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ 45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments RJ 45 Connector pin assignment MDI X Media Dependant Contact MDI Media Dependant Interface Interface Cross ra Tx transmit ra Tx transmit el eee Tx transmit Tx transmit 996 The standard cable RJ 45 pin assignment The standard RJ 45 receptacle connector User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight Cable 12 3 4 5 67 8 SIDE 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 Crossover Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
475. sited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Event table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest Event Index and Log Index found in the Event table table screen in Figure 4 18 6 appears RMON Event Overview start from Control Index o and sample Index o with 20 entries per page Fa Logindex LogDescription Mo morg entres Figure 4 18 6 RMON Event Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Event Index Indicates the index of the event entry e Log Index Indicates the index of the log entry e LogTime Indicates Event log time e LogDescription Indicates the Event description Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds kx Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 18 7 RMON History Configuration Configure RMON History table on this page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 18 7 appears 325 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R RMON History Configuration Buckets Delete 10 Data Source interval Buckets Buckets ENTE Figure 4 18 7 RMON history configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object D
476. snap_8021h OUI value Hexadecimal 00 00 00 to FF FF FF 544 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt pid gt PID value 0x0 0xF FFF If OUI is 00 00 00 valid range of PID is from 0x0600 0xF FFF VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete LLC Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN LLC protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Llc lt dsap gt lt ssap gt Parameters lt dsap gt DSAP value 0x00 0xFF lt ssap gt SSAP value 0x00 0xFF VCL Protocol based VLAN Add Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN group to VLAN mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Vlan Add lt port_list gt lt group_id gt lt vid gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt group_id gt Protocol group ID lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN group to VLAN mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Vlan Delete lt port_list gt lt group_id gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 545 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL Protocol based VLAN Configuration Description Show VCL protocol based VLAN entries Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Conf VCL IP based VLAN Configuration Description Show VCL IP Subnet based VLAN configuration Syntax VCL IPVlan Configuration lt vce_id gt Parameters lt vce_id gt Unique VCE
477. starting from the current entry ID Clear Flushes the selected log entries Hide Hides the selected log entries Download ald Downloads the selected log entries kx Updates the system log entries starting from the first available entry ID Updates the system log entries ending at the last entry currently displayed wt Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed gt Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID 4 2 12 Detailed Log The switch system detailed log information is provided here The Detailed Log screen in Figure 4 2 15 appears 65 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Detalled System Log Information m Message Level Info Time 1970 01 01 Thu 00 00 09 00 00 Message Switch just made a cold boot Figure 4 2 15 Detailed Log page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Message The message of the system log entry Buttons Dowridoad Download the system log entry to the current entry ID Refresh Updates the system log entry to the current entry ID kx Updates the system log entry to the first available entry ID ES Updates the system log entry to the previous available entry ID gt gt Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID gt Updates the system log entry to the last avail
478. status overview for all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following information The Bridge Status screen in Figure 4 7 8 appears STP Bridges Root Topolo Topolo en en _ a meo e Flag Change Last CIST o0 00 00 30 4P 11 22 55 9 00 00 00 50 4F 11 42 55 steady Auto refresh CI Refresh Refresh Figure 4 7 8 STP Bridge Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance e Root ID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role e Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge this is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge 144 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R e Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance e Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred Buttons Auto refresh ll Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 7 4 CIST Port Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well T
479. supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using static entries into the MAC Table Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software 222 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone and only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Overview of User Authentication It is allowed to configure the Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods such as telnet and Web browser This Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following op
480. switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags Header tags Section tags Module tags Group tags Parameter tags lt xml version 1 0 gt and lt configuration gt These tags are mandatory and must be present at the beginning of the file lt platform gt lt global gt and lt switch gt The platform section must be the first section tag and this section must include the correct platform ID and version The global section is optional and includes configuration which is not related to specific switch ports The switch section is optional and includes configuration which is related to specific switch ports lt ip gt lt mac gt lt port gt etc These tags identify a module controlling specific parts of the configuration lt port_table gt lt vlan_table gt etc These tags identify a group of parameters typically a table lt mode gt lt entry gt etc These tags identify parameters for the specific section module and group The lt entry gt tag is used for table entries Configuration parameters are represented as attribute values When saving the configuration from the switch the entire configuration including syntax descriptions is included in the file The file may then be modified using an editor and loaded to a switch The examples below shows a small configuration file only including configuration of the MAC address age time and the learning mode per
481. t e LLC e SNAP e IPv4 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Key configuration are discribed as below Tag Value of Tag field can be Any Untag or Tag VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1 4095 or Any user can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any SMAC Source MAC address 24 MS bits OUI or Any DMAC Type Destination MAC type possible values are unicast UC multicast MC broadcast BC or Any Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values 1 Any 2 Ethernet 3 LLC 4 SNAP 5 IPv4 6 IPv6 Note all frame types are explained below Allow all types of frames Ethernet Type Valid ethernet type can have value within Ox600 OxFFFF or Any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 and 0x86DD IPv6 default value is Any SSAP Address Valid SSAP Source Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any DSAP Address Valid DSAP Destination Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any PID Valid PID a k a ethernet type can have value within Ox00 OxFFFF or Any default value is Any Protocol IP pro
482. t DSCP This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports The Port DSCP screen in Figure 4 9 9 appears Qos Port DSCP Configuration 4 4 4 4 Oleole Br Br Br 4 4 4 ola EE TIFF 44 Slelelelslels Be fe Be Be Be Be Be E 4 lt lt 4 d d d d F Disa d d d E 4 be fije fee Figure 4 9 9 QoS Port DSCP Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress settings e Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress Buttons Save User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R E Translate m Classify e Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox e Classify Classification for a port have 4 different values Disable No Ingress DSCP Classification m DSCP 0 Classify if incoming or translated if enabled DSCP is 0 Selected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP m All Classify all DSCP e Egress Port Egress Rewriting can be one of Disable No Egress rewrite m Enable Rewrite enable without remapped Remap DP Unaware DSCP from analyzer
483. t Description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter 1D for the settings contained in the same row e Rate The allowed values are 0 3276700 in pps or 0 100 200 300 1000000 in kbps e Unit Specify the rate unit The allowed values are pps packets per second kbps Kbits per second User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 221 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 11 Authentication This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch includes the user access and management control The Authentication section contains links to the following main topics m IEEE 802 1X Port Based Network Access Control E MAC Based Authentication m User Authentication Overview of 802 1X Port Based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch
484. t Setting empty Example To set log server address WGSW 24040 gt log server address 192 168 0 21 System Location Description Set or show the system location Syntax System Location lt location gt Parameters lt location gt System location string 1 255 Use to clear the string In CLI no blank or space characters are permitted as part of a location Default Setting empty 343 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example To set device location WGSW 24040 gt System location 9F LAB System Log Level Description Show or set the system log level It uses to determine what kind of message will send to syslog server Syntax System Log Level info warning error Parameters info Send informations warnings and errors warning Send warnings and errors error Send errors Default Setting info Example To set log level WGSW 24040 gt log level warning System Timezone Description Set or show the system timezone offset Syntax System Timezone lt offset gt Parameters lt offset gt Time zone offset in minutes 720 to 720 relative to UTC Default Setting 0 344 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example To set timezone WGSW 24040 gt system timezone 120 System Log Lookup Description Show or clear the system log Syntax System Log Lookup lt log_id gt alllinfo warning error Parameters
485. t is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on each switch The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 10 1 appears ACL Status User Ingress Port Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Redirect CPU Once Conflict Mo entries Combined Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 10 1 ACL Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Indicates the ACL user e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type 206 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching
486. t security network nas eapoltimeout 100 Security Network NAS Agetime Description Time in seconds between check for activity on successfully authenticated MAC addresses Syntax Security Network NAS Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt Time between checks 10 1000000 seconds default Show current age time Default Setting 300 Example Set NAS age time in 1000sec WGSW 24040 gt security network nas agetime 1000 Security Network NAS Holdtime Description Time in seconds before a MAC address that failed authentication gets a new authentication chance Syntax Security Network NAS Holdtime lt hold_time gt 424 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters lt hold_time gt Time on hold 10 1000000 seconds default Show current hold time Default Setting 10 Example Set NAS hold time in 100sec WGSW 24040 gt security network nas holdtime 100 Security Network NAS RADIUS QoS Description Set or show either global state use the global keyword or per port state of RADIUS assigned QoS Syntax Security Network NAS RADIUS_QoS global lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned QoS setting lt port_list gt Select the per port RADIUS assigned QoS setting default Show current per port RADIUS assigned QoS state enable Enable RADIUS assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable RADIUS
487. t the port redirect operation is disabled Specify the mirror operation of this port Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Description Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value appears When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter stat
488. t to the sFlow receiver originating from this port Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page Clear Recerver Clear Ports Clears the sFlow receiver counters Clears the per port counters 318 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 18 RMON RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP RMON is a set of MIB definitions used to define standard network monitor functions and interfaces enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets MID of RMON consists of 10 groups The switch supports the most frequently used group 1 2 3 and 9 M Statistics Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the Agent History Record periodical statistic samples available from Statistics NW Alarm Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for RMON Agent records NW Event Alist of all events generated by RMON Agent Alarm depends on the implementation of Event Statistics and History display some current or history subnet statistics Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network and provide some alerts upon abnormal events sending Trap or record in logs 4 18 1 RMON Alar
489. t vid gt ipmec_param_qri Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP 936 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_qri 1 Default Value 100 0 31744 Query Response Interval in tenths of seconds default Show IPMC Interface Query Response Interval IPMC Parameter LLQI Description Set or show the IPMC Last Listener Query Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter LLQI mld igmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_Ilqi Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_Ilqi 1 Default Value 10 0 31744 Last Listener Query Interval in tenths of seconds default Show IPMC Interface Last Listener Query Interval IPMC Parameter URI Description Set or show the IPMC Unsolicited Report Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter URI mldligmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_uri Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_uri 937 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 1 Default Value 1 0 31744 Unsolicited Report Interval in seconds default Show IPMC Interface Unsolicited Report Interval 938 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 22 sFlow Command sFlow Configuration Description Show global
490. tag priority is specified tag priority is don t care The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type ARP is selected Object e ARP RARP e Request Reply Description Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care ARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to ARP RARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to RARP Other Frame has unknown ARP RARP Opcode flag Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE 212 e Sender IP Filter e Sender IP Address e Sender IP Mask e Target IP Filter e Target IP Address e Target IP Mask e ARP Sender MAC Match e RARP Target MAC Match e P Ethernet Length User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care Request Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set Reply Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE Any No sender IP filter is specified Sender IP filter is don t care Host Sender IP filter is set to Host Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Sender IP filter is set to Network Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation
491. tandard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP LLDP MED LLDP MED is an extendsion of IEEE 802 1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association TIA 1057 LOC LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network Can be used as a switch criteria by EPS MAC Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MEP MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group ITU T Y 1731 MD5
492. tatic and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here The MAC Address Table Configuration screen in Figure 4 13 1 appears MAC Address Table Configuration Aging Configuration Disable Automatic Aging Aging Time seconds MAC Table Learning Port Members Disable O Secure Static MAC Table Configuration Port Members AAA rm Derete vran 10 mac address af2fa a s s 7 a 9 a0 sa 12 3 14 15 16 17 a9 a9 20 23 2 oa za Figure 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Aging Configuration 282 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Object e Disable Automatic Aging e Aging
493. te The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handles isolate and promiscuous ports and the each PCs are not able to access each other PCs of each isolate port But they all need to access with the same server AP Printer The screen in Figure 4 6 14 appears This section will show you how to configure the port for the server that could be accessed by each isolate port 127 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Internet Promiscuous Public Servers Pi or iscuous VLAN 1 Private VLAN VLAN 2 Private VLAN Setup steps 1 Assign Port Mode Set Port 1 Port 4 in Isolate port Set Port5 and Port 6 in Promiscuous port The screen in Figure 4 6 15 appears Port Number 1 213 4 5 6 7 8 9110 OOOUOOO Figure 4 6 15 The configuration of Isolate and Promiscuous port 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 1 Port 1 Port 2 Port 5 and Port 3 VLAN 2 Port 3 Port 6 The screen in Figure 4 6 16 appears 128 4 6 11 MAC based VLAN User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Port Members rer embers Delete evan wo 213 lass ele so 2 Er iv ELI CI OI Od Figure 4 6 16 Private VLAN port setting The MAC based VLAN enties can be configured here This page allows for adding and deleting MAC based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries The MAC based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 17 appears
494. ter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears Range If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value When Range is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value Specify the TCP UDP destination filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP destination filter is specified TCP UDP destination filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears Range If you want to filter a specific range TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame 216 e TCP UDP Destination Range e
495. ters lt ether_type gt arp ip ipx at Ether Type 0x0600 OxFFFF lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL Protocol based VLAN Add SNAP Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN SNAP protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Snap lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h lt pid gt lt group_id gt Parameters lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h OUI value Hexadecimal 00 00 00 to FF FF FF 943 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt pid gt PID value 0x0 0xF FFF If OUI is 00 00 00 valid range of PID is from 0x0600 0xF FFF lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL Protocol based VLAN Add LLC Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN LLC protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Llc lt dsap gt lt ssap gt lt group_id gt Parameters lt dsap gt DSAP value 0x00 0xFF lt ssap gt SSAP value 0x00 0xFF lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete Ethernet Il Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN Ethernet protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Eth2 lt ether_type gt arplip ipx at Parameters lt ether_type gt arp ip ipx at Ether Type 0x0600 OxFFFF VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete SNAP Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN SNAP protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Snap lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h lt pid gt Parameters lt oui gt rfc_1042
496. ters lt ip_addr gt _ IP address a b c d default Show IP address lt ip_mask gt IP subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask lt ip_router gt IP router a b c d default Show IP router lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show VLAN ID Default Setting IP Address 192 168 0 100 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 0 1 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 349 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R VLAN ID 1 Example Set IP address WGSW 24040 gt ip setup 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 IP Ping Description Ping IP address ICMP echo Syntax IP Ping lt ip_addr_string gt Length lt ping_length gt Count lt ping_count gt Interval lt ping_interval gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IPv4 host address a b c d or a host name string length PING Length keyword lt ping length gt Ping ICMP data length 2 1452 Default is 56 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers count PING Count keyword lt ping_count gt Transmit ECHO_REQUEST packet count 1 60 Default is 5 interval PING Interval keyword lt ping_interval gt Ping interval 0 30 Default is 0 Example WGSW 24040 gt ip ping 192 168 0 21 PING server 192 168 0 21 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 3 time 10ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent
497. ters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port policer flow control disable Disable port policer flow control 488 default Show port policer flow control mode Default Setting disable QoS Port Scheduler Mode Description Set or show the port scheduler mode Syntax QoS Port Scheduler Mode lt port_list gt strict weighted Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports strict Strict mode weighted Weighted mode default Show port scheduler mode Default Setting strict Example Set the port schedule mode in weighted mode User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt qos Port Scheduler Mode 1 10 weighted QoS Port Scheduler Weight Description Set or show the port scheduler weight Syntax QoS Port Scheduler Weight lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt lt weight gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Weighted queue list or all default All weighted queues 0 5 lt weight gt Scheduler weight 1 100 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R QoS Port QueueShaper Mode Description Set or show the port queue shaper mode Syntax QoS Port QueueShaper Mode lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or all defa
498. that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP S A Samba is a program running under UNIX like operating systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and Microsoft Windows machines Samba acts as file and print servers for Microsoft Windows IBM OS 2 and other SMB client machines Samba uses the Server Message Block SMB protocol and Common Internet File System CIFS which is the underlying protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms including Linux most common Unix platforms OpenVMS and IBM OS 2 Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in Microsoft Windows Neighborhood Network SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It
499. that the switch attempts to send a supplicant s first response packet to the backend server Indicates the switch attempted communication with the backend server Possible retransmissions are not counted MAC based Counts all the backend server packets sent from the switch towards the backend server for a given port left most table or client right most table Possible retransmissions are not counted e Last Supplicant Client Info Selected Counters Object e Selected Counters Attached MAC Address User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Name IEEE Name Description MAC dotixAuthLastEapolF The MAC address of the last supplicant client Address rameSource VLAN ID The VLAN ID on which the last frame from the last supplicant client was received Version dot1xAuthLastEapolF 802 1X based rameVersion The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable Identity 802 1X based The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable Description The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is one of the following administrative states Multi 802 1X MAC
500. the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Redirect Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are redirected to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port redirect operation is disabled e CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU e CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted the order sequence cannot be changed and the priority is highest The Access Control List C
501. the NAS and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client s supplied credentials are valid Based on the answer the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802 1X NetBIOS NFS NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model NFS is an acronym for Network File System It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persistent storage over a computer network 966 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer O OR OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance It is a protocol described in
502. the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements E Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups E Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree m Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used a The unique switch identifier E The path cost to the root associated with each switch port E The port identifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information E The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the ro
503. the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 18 10 RMON Statistics Configuration Configure RMON Statistics table on this page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 18 10 appears 329 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R RMON Statistics Configuration Delete 1D Data Source Figure 4 18 10 RMON Statistics configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch ID 1 for example if the port is switch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 18 11 RMON Statistics Detail This page provides an Detail of a specific RMON statistics entry screen in Figure 4 18 11 appears 330 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Detailed RMON Statistics ID Auto refresh d Port undefined Drops Octets Pkts Broadcast Multicast CRO Alignment Undersize Oversize Fragments Jabber Collisions b4 Bytes 65 127 Bytes 128 255 Bytes 256 511 Bytes 512 1023 Bytes 1024 1518 Bytes MmMIOOOmOOOOOOOoOOoOoOoOoO E
504. the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The SSH Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 5 appears SSH Configuration Figure 4 12 5 SSH Configuration screen page screenshot 270 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are a Enabled Enable SSH mode operation a Disabled Disable SSH mode operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 271 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 12 6 Port Security Status This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled
505. their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Object Description e Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion e Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors e Rx Undersize The number of short frames received with valid CRC e Rx Oversize The number of long frames received with valid CRC e Rx Fragments The number of short frames received with invalid CRC e Rx Jabber The number of long frames received with invalid CRC e Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port 1 Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes 2 Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Transmit Error Counters Object Description e Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion e Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions 92 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Buttons Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh E Check this box to enable an automatic refres
506. tion Clear all ACL counters Syntax Security Network ACL Clear Example Clear all ACL counters User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security network acl clear Security Network ACL Status Description Show ACL status Syntax Security Network ACL Status combined staticlloop_ protectidhcp upnplarp_inspectionlipmclip_ source _guard conflicts Parameters combined Show combined status static Show static user configured status loop_protect Shows the status by Loop Protect dhcp Show DHCP status upnp Show UPnP status arp_inspection Show ARP Inspection status ipmc Show IPMC status ip_source_guard Show IP Source Guard status Example conflicts Show conflict status default Show combined status Show ACL status WGSW 24040 gt security network acl status 433 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Network ACL Port State Description Set or show the ACL port state Syntax Security Network ACL Port State lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable disable ACL port state Default Setting Enable Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration Description Show DHCP relay configuration Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration Example Show DHCP relay configuration WGSW 24040 gt security network dhcp relay configuration DHCP Relay Configuration
507. tion Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance Debug Only present in CLI e Privilege Level Every privilege level group has an authorization level for the following sub groups configuration read only configuration execute read write status statistics read only status statistics read write e g for clearing of Statistics Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 6 NTP Configuration Configure NTP on this page NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP data grams as transport layer You can specify NTP Servers and set GMT Time zone The NTP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 8 appears NTP Configuration Time Zone GMT Casablanca Monova Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London e Server 2 57 The page includes the following fields Object e Mode e Time Zone e Server Buttons Save Click to save changes User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Figure 4 2 8 NTP Configuration page screenshot Description Indicates the NTP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable NTP mode operation When enable NTP mode operation the agent forward and to transfer NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain Disabled Disable NTP mo
508. tions Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS Local user name and Priviledge Level control RADIUS and TACACS are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the Managed Switch 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States a Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific role
509. tions e Most visually appealing SNMP Agent e Communicates with switch functions at e Requires SNMP manager software the MIB level e Least visually appealing of all three methods e Based on open standards e Some settings require calculations e Security can be compromised hackers need only know the community name Table 3 1 Management Methods Comparison 3 3 Administration Console The administration console is an internal character oriented and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this method you can view the administration console from a terminal personal computer Apple Macintosh or workstation connected to the switch s console serial port There are two ways to use this management method via direct access or modem port access The following sections describe these methods For more information about using the console refer to Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Console Management 40 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R PC Workstation with Terminal emulation software Serial Port Serial Port 115200 8 n 1 Figure 3 1 Console management Direct Access Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal to the Managed Switch console serial port When using this management method a straight DB9 RS 232 cable
510. tistics 941 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 23 VLAN Control List Command VCL MAC based VLAN Configuration Description Show VCL MAC based VLAN configuration Syntax VCL Macvlan Configuration VCL MAC based VLAN Add Description Add or modify VCL MAC based VLAN entry Syntax VCL Macvlan Add lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address xx xX XX XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Add 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 in VLAN 20 for all port User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt vcl macvlan add 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 20 1 10 VCL MAC based VLAN Delete Description Delete VCL MAC based VLAN entry Syntax VCL Macvlan Del lt mac_addr gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address xx xX XX XX XX XX 942 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Example Delete 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 in MAC based VLAN list WGSW 24040 gt vel macvlan del 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 VCL Stasus Description Show VCL MAC based VLAN users configuration Syntax VCL Status combined static nas all Parameters combined static nas all VCL User VCL Protocol based VLAN Add Ethernet II Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN Ethernet protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Eth2 lt ether_type gt arpl ip ipx at lt group_id gt Parame
511. tocol SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response Get Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message SNMP community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are Write private Read public Use the SNMP Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s SNMP function This section has the following items a System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this page a System Information The system information is provides here 11 SNMPv3 Communities SNMPv3 Users SNMPv3 Groups SNMPv3 Views SNMPv3 Accesses User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page Configure
512. tocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP Specific Source IP address in value mask format or Any IP and Mask are in the format x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 When Mask is converted to a 32 bit binary string and read from left to right all bits following the first zero must also be zero DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF 11 AF43 IP Fragment Pv4 frame fragmented option yes nolany 198 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e IPv6 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP Pv6 source address a b c d or Any 32 LS bits DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e Action Parameters Class QoS class 0 7 or Default DP Valid Drop Precedence Level can be 0 3 or Default DSCP Valid DSCP value ca
513. two ports This way the MAC table requirements is reduced VLAN Port Configuration The VLAN Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 2 appears 112 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R VLAN Port Configuration Mode 168830210 y Set out layer LAN tag ether type Figure 4 6 2 VLAN Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port e PVID Ingress Filtering e Accept Frame Type Description This is the logical port number for this row Allow assign PVID for selected port The range for the PVID is 1 4094 The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port The PVID must as same as the VLAN ID that the port belong to VLAN group or the untagged traffic will be dropped Enable ingress filtering for a port by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged 113 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All e Link Type Allow 802 1Q Untagged or Tagged VLAN for selected port When adding a VLAN to s
514. ty NetWork LIMLACUON sarron a id a nets ead ai bata 419 Security Network Limit REOPEN sii a odias 420 Security Network NAS Configura ON ot A a 420 Security Network NAS Mode ccccccseccceececeeeeseeeeceeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeseaeeseeeeseueessaeessaeeeseeeeseacesseesseeeeseueessasessneeess 421 Securty Network NAS tale nn a a ot sn e o no an 422 Security Network NAS Reauthentication oocccooccccoccncconocononoconnnonocononcnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnonnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnins 422 Security Network NAS ReauthP eri ic 2icc tests iors antec acti ds di edad 423 Security Network NAS EapolTiMeout occccoccnccccnccccccconcncnncncnncnononnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanes 423 Securty NetWork INAS ADC IN a hi tac al al ele i at 424 Security Network NAS HoldimMe cs calco cen dees Seated ed dec acs Siang oxen ooo acs eee cb rec ard seal 424 Security Network NAS RADIUS OOS cre arias 425 Security Network NAS RADIUS _ VLAN ssccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesaaaaaaaeseeneees 425 12 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Security Network NAS Guest VLAN inna ole ee e a ai 426 Security Network NAS Authenticate ooocccooocnccococonoconcnnonononcnnononononcnnoronnnnonnnnononrnnnrnnrnnonannnnnnnrnnoranrnnnnananess 427 Security Network INAS Stats US wissis cvaceh dd td la dd ius aa sl act 427 Security Network ACL Configuration oocc
515. ual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show TACACS authentication server configuration enable Enable TACACS authentication server disable Disable TACACS authentication server default Show TACACS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external authentication server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server TCP port Use 0 to use the default TACACS port 49 Example Set TACACS authentication server configuration WGSW 24040 gt security aaa tacacs 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 49 Security AAA Statistics Description Show RADIUS statistics Syntax Security AAA Statistics lt server_index gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show statistics for all servers Example Show RADIUS statistics WGSW 24040 gt security aaa statistics 449 6 8 Spanning Tree Protocol Command STP Configuration Description Show STP Bridge configuration Syntax STP Configuration Example Show STP configuration WGSW 24040 gt stp cofiguration STP Configuration Protocol Version MSTP Max Age 20 Forward Delay 15 Tx Hold Count 6 Max Hop Count 20 BPDU Filtering Disabled BPDU Guard Disabled Error Recovery Disabled STP Version
516. ult lt community gt Specify the community when trap is sent the string lengh is 0 127 default public lt description gt The string for describing this event the string lengh is 0 127 default null string Security Switch RMON Event Delete Description Delete RMON Event entry The entry index key is lt event_id gt Syntax Security Switch RMON Event Delete lt event_id gt Parameters lt event_id gt Event ID 1 65535 Security Switch RMON Event Lookup Description Show RMON Event entries Syntax Security Switch RMON Event Lookup lt event_id gt Parameters lt event_id gt Event ID 1 65535 414 Security Network Psec Switch Description Show Port Security status Syntax Security Network Psec Switch lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show port security status WGSW 24040 gt security network psec switch Users L Limit Control 8 802 1X D DHCP Snooping V Voice VLAN Port Users State MAC Cnt No users Security Network Psec Port Description Show MAC Addresses learned by Port Security Syntax Security Network Psec Port lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show MAC address learned on port 1 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt security network psec port 1 415 MAC Address
517. ult All ports enable Enable port policer disable Disable port policer default Show port policer mode Default Setting disable Example Enable QoS port policer User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt qos Port Policer Mode 1 10 enable QoS Port Policer Rate Description Set or show the port policer rate Syntax QoS Port Policer Rate lt port_list gt lt rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt rate gt Rate in kbps or fps 100 13200000 Default Setting 500 Example Set the port policer rate in 1000 487 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R WGSW 24040 gt q0s Port Policer Rate 1 10 1000 QoS Port Policer Unit Description Set or show the port policer unit Syntax QoS Port Policer Unit lt port_list gt kbps fps Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports kbps Unit is kilo bits per second fps Unit is frames per second default Show port policer unit Default Setting kbps Example Set the port policer unit in fps WGSW 24040 gt qos Port Policer unit 1 10 fps QoS Port Policer Flow Control Description Set or show the port policer flow control If policer flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode then pause frames are sent instead of discarding frames Syntax QoS Port Policer FlowControl lt port_list gt enable disable Parame
518. ult All queues 0 7 enable Enable port queue shaper disable Disable port queue shaper default Show port queue shaper mode Default Setting disable Example Enable port queue shaper for all port amp queue WGSW 24040 gt qos Port QueueShaper Mode 1 10 0 7 enable QoS Port QueueShaper Rate Description Set or show the port queue shaper rate Syntax QoS Port QueueShaper Rate lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt lt bit_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or all default All queues 0 7 lt bit_rate gt Rate in kilo bits per second 100 13200000 Default Setting 500kbps Example 490 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Set the port queue shaper rate in 1000 WGSW 24040 gt qos Port QueueShaper rate 1 10 0 7 1000 QoS Port QueueShaper Excess Description Set or show the port queue excess bandwidth mode Syntax QoS Port QueueShaper Excess lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or all default All queues 0 7 enable Enable use of excess bandwidth disable Disable use of excess bandwidth default Show port queue excess bandwidth mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the port queue excess bandwidth mode WGSW 24040 gt qos Port QueueShaper Ex
519. um of 10 ports to be aggregated at the same time The Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 5 groups If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregationing group then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a local static link aggregationing group then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow for example a TCP connection are always forwarded on the same link aggregation member port Reording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible The aggregation code is based on the following information e Source MAC e Destination MAC e Source and destination IPv4 address e Source and destination TCP UDP ports for IPv4 packets Normally all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link aggregation member ports Each link aggregation may consist of up to 10 member ports Any quantity of link aggregation s may be configured for the device only limited by the quantity of ports on the device To configure a proper traffic distribution the ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed 98 4 5 1 Static Aggregation User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group The aggregation
520. under the Access Control List page You can you also set up specific traffic properties Action Rate Limiter Port copy etc for each ingress port They will though only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched In that case a counter associated with that port is incremented See the Web page help text for each specific port property ACL Rate Limiters Under this page you can configure the rate limiters There can be 15 different rate limiters each 558 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R ranging from 1 1024K packets per seconds Under Ports and Access Control List web pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the ACE s or ingress port s AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard The encryption key protocol is applied in 802 1i standard to improve WLAN security It is an encryption standard by the U S government which will replace DES and 3DES AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128 192 or 256 bits AMS is an acronym for Auto Media Select AMS is used for dual media ports ports supporting both copper cu and fiber SFP cables AMS automatically determines if a SFP or a CU cable is inserted and switches to the corresponding media If both SFP and cu cables are inserted the port will select the prefered media APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching This protocol is used to secure that switching is done bidirectional in the two ends
521. up the IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 network infrastructure speedily To fulfill the demand PLANET releases the IPv6 management Gigabit Ethernet Switch SGSW series Managed Switch It supports both IPv4 and IPv6 management functions It can work with original network structure IPv4 and also support the new network structure IPv6 in the future With easy and friendly management interfaces and plenty of management functions included the SGSW series Managed Switch is the best choice for ISP to build the IPv6 FTTx edge service and for SMB to connect with IPv6 network 21 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R High Performance Cost effective Telecom class Gigabit solution for Enterprise backbone and Data Center Networking The PLANET Managed Switch is a L2 L4 Managed Gigabit Switch Since Gigabit network interface had become the basic equipment and requirement of Enterprise and Network Servers with 48Gbps switching fabric the Managed Switch can handle extremely large amounts of data in a secure topology linking to a backbone or high capacity servers The powerful QoS and Network Security features make it to meets the needs of effective data traffic control for both Campus and Enterprise such VolP video streaming and multicast application High Performance The Managed Switch provides 24 10 100 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports with 4 shared Gigabit SFP slots It boasts a high performance switch architecture that is capable of provi
522. uplex LC connector type Connect the fiber cable Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver Connect the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media Converter Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Managed Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link failed Co works with some fiber NICs or Media Converters set the Link mode to 1000 Force or 100 Force is needed Remove the transceiver module Make sure there is no network activity by consult or check with the network administrator Or through the management interface of the switch converter if available to disable the port in advance Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently Turn the handle of the MGB module to horizontal Pull out the module gently through the handle 3 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Figure 2 11 Pull out the SFP transceiver Never pull out the module without pull the handle or the push bolts on the module Direct pull out the module with violent could damage the module and SFP module slot of the Managed Switch 2 2 4 Connecting DC Power Supply WGSW 24040R The WGSW 24040R supports 48VDC power input connect the power cable to the switch at the input terminal block 1 The size of the three screws in the terminal block is M3 5 2 The termin
523. ura ON tt A A A A AA antec eae 111 LO ONVLAN MS MDS MD a a 114 4 6 6 VLAN Membership Otatus ccoocccccccnccccnccocnnonoconononononnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnn nen nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenanines 116 RAE O O oo Saher a adey ates Garena chase 117 40 30 Private LAN sah AS AAA A A Ga ee 119 46 9 POSO AO A A EE 120 AO NO MANS EEN example earn 122 4 6 10 1 Two separate 802 1Q VLAN coat idad 122 4 6 10 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware switch o cccconccocococnnononnncononnncnnncnnonononcnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnos 125 4 0105 FO1L SOS tit aa aueueneabenncees 127 AsO AT MAGC DBased VLAN Si Sa 129 46 12MAC based VIEAN SIAlUS sr eicBedaca E aulct deddn eae a E ceed ence eas 130 46413 IR Subnet based VW LAIN ses cocci oleae A A A ai 131 46 14 PrOLOCOlDASsed VLAN ni e deed Whee 132 4 6 15 Protocol based VLAN Mambership ccccscccceccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeea cece eeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeesaeeeaes 134 4 7 SDANAING Tree Protocols ies 136 A RR 136 eo NN aati A ae nN er A 142 AUS Bdge Stals sai i a ee a ste coe eee nt et eee ee ee S 144 ATA Clo Por OMNGUIALON sso a cee eee 145 Bf ONS AAA E PE ONO baenediaadeavedsunedtel ee ENE 148 ATEO MSI COMA ete ee ct ee ee aCe dl a o e ere eee ee a 149 AT al MS TIPOS CONTIgUa ON si e Ace deseo heehee cele 150 AES Ore OW ei lea das o ooo con 152 AO RES UIC Steaua e e tatiana aes etn ateh tua at aes ete enue Raton a Ratencsetaeeens 153 AS
524. urce Guard table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table The Start from port address VLAN IP address and IP mask input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest 286 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R next Dynamic IP Source Guard Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC address The MAC address of the entry e IP Address The IP address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh ll Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Fetish Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start fro
525. urred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost Buttons Get Click to set MSTx configuration Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 8 Port Status This page displays the STP CIST port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Status screen in Figure 4 7 14 appears STP Port Status Port CIST Role CIST State NMon STP Forwarding Mon STP Forwarding Mon STP Forwarding Mon STP Forwarding Mon STP Forwarding Mon STP Forwarding Forwarding Non STP Non STP Forwarding Mon STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Mon STP Forwarding Mon STP Forwarding Mon STP Forwarding Auto refresh LJ Figure 4 7 14 STP Port Status page screenshot 152 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e CIST Role The current STP port r
526. us is don t care 211 e DMAC Value E VLAN Parameters Object e 802 1Q Tagged e VLAN ID Filter e VLAN ID e Tag Priority Ea ARP Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DMAC value appears When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx Xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value Description Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802 1Q tagged The allowed values are Any Any value is allowed don t care Enabled Tagged frame only Disabled Untagged frame only The default value is Any Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID filter you can enter a specific VLAN ID number The allowed range is 1 to 4095 A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no
527. ut will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors e CDP Aware Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbours table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP 290 e Port Descr e Sys Name e Sys Descr e Sys Capa e Mgmt Addr Buttons Save Click to save changes User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbours table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped to the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped to the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbours table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped to the LLDP Port ID field CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped to the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP support system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in t
528. v4 UDP protocol frames Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file TCP Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value Specify the Time to Live settings for this ACE zero lPv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry non zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE This involves the settings for the More Fragments MF bit and the Fragment Offset FRAG OFFSET field for an IPv4 frame No IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater 214 e IP Option e SIP Filter e SIP Address e SIP Mask e DIP Filter e DIP Address e DIP Mask ICMP Parameters Object e ICMP Type Filter e ICMP Type Value User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R than zero must not be able to match this entry Yes IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the options
529. voice Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting 480 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R interactive voice services guest_voice signaling Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media softphone_voice Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN video_conferencing Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services streaming_video Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type video_ signaling Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media tagged The device is using tagged frames unragged The device is usi
530. void the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately Revision PLANET 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 Shared SFP Managed Gigabit Switch User s Manual FOR MODELS WGSW 24040 24040R REVISION 2 0 September 2012 Part No EM WGSW 24040_24040R 2080 A93070 00 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R TABLE OF CONETNTS T AINTRODU TIO Nori AAA 21 let PAcket Contents util dd 21 1 2 Proquct DeESCHPUON nsioiu iaa aa a aA a Eaa aaa aaa i 21 13 HOW to Use TMS MINUA osinn a a Ea Eaa aAa 23 1 4 Product Features iia a 24 PRO dUCES PEC CAMION A A A A A AAA 27 Z2 INS TALLA NON conca a pues dake abet ueeauwecawessebseseausbaaahoseyceetesstceuvevetl 30 2 Hardware Descrip eaa ebay acetate arent Chania wt a te eeneuetuariacess 30 2 VA SVG TOME anei saae iat eater artes ba neescettiga beled a A eheteuee seh Heine 30 AZ LED MCN CAO INS Rea Ric nats ma a oi Nadie ee a sae 31 ZO MICA Rear al are a ve ee eee Oe ee eee a eee ee 32 2 2 Stall THE SWIC scoccoes aie at terete cease eee eee 33 22 Desk INISTAIATION sociale A sense eee oe E nsec ee Rade 33 22 2 FRACK MOUNINO a a 34 2 2 3 Installing the SEP anSCClvVeh ii A A ida 36 2 2 4 Conn
531. w computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DHCP Relay DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 and Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_ id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal O in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address DHCP Snooping
532. will match only IPV6 frames Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column Displays Conflict status of QCL entries As H W resources are shared by multiple applications It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not be available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the H W resources required to add QCL entry on pressing Resolve Conflict button Combined w Select the QCL status from this drop down list Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Resolve Conflict Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry in case the conflict status for any QCL entry is yes Refiesh_ Click to refresh the page 200 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 9 13 Storm Control Configuration Storm control for the switch is configured on this page There is a uni
533. witch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 200 000 Gigabit ports could be used but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link 4 7 2 STP System Configuration This page allows you to configure STP system settings The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch or switch Stack The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols Compatiable Spanning Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Normal Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops Extension Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs VLANs This Per VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning Tree The STP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 7 appears STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings Protocol Version Bridge Priority Forward Delay Maximum Hop Count Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering Edge Port BPOU Guard Port Error Recovery Port E
534. with an address table This address table composed of many entries Each entry is used to store the address information of some node in network including MAC address port no etc This in formation comes from the learning process of Ethernet Switch 7 2 Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Switch will record the source address port no And the other related information in address table This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets 7 3 Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Ethernet Switching will lookup the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected If found and the destination address is located at different port from this packet comes in the Ethernet Switching will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address table But if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in then this packet will be filtered Thereby increasing the network throughput and availability 7 4 Store and Forward Store and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forw
535. wnTypes radiusAccClientExt PacketsDropped radiusAccClientExt Requests radiusAccClientExt Retransmissions radiusAccClientExt PendingRequests radiusAccClientExt Timeouts packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS packets containing invalid authenticators received from the server The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types that were received from the server on the accounting port The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS packets retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting server The number of RADIUS packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when a Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of a Response timeout or retransmission The number of accounting timeouts to the server After a e Other Info User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout This section c
536. x Voice VLAN Traffic Class lt class gt Parameters lt class gt Traffic class 0 7 Default Setting T Example Set 4 traffic class for voice VLAN WGSW 24040 gt voice vlan traffic class4 Voice VLAN OUI Add Description Add Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process The maximum entry number is 16 Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Add lt oui_addr gt lt description gt Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx The null OUI address isn t allowed lt description gt Entry description Use clear or to clear the string No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact only in CLI Example Add Voice VLAN OUI entry WGSW 24040 gt voice vian oui add 00 11 22 test 919 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Voice VLAN OUI Delete Description Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Delete lt oui_addr gt Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx The null OUI address isn t allowed Example Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry WGSW 24040 gt voice vlan oui delete 00 11 22 Voice VLAN OUI Clear Description Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Clear Example Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry WGSW 24040 gt voice vlan oui clear Voice VLAN OUI Lookup Description L
537. x operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Links can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the relevant links Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation speed Duplex setting etc The device supports the following Aggregation links a Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregared selected ports to be a trunk group a Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them Le Ee eee E ao Aa O i has qD Link Aggregation 4 ports aggregate up to 4Gbps A Figure 4 5 1 Link Aggregation User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode more detail informat
538. y default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New IP Click Add New Entry to add a new IP subnet based VLAN entry An empty row subnet based VLAN is added to the table and the IP subnet based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any IP address mask can be configured for the IP subnet based VLAN 131 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R entry Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The IP subnet based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on Save The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new IP subnet based VLANs i om El O New Entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table La F 5 Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Retresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 6 14 Protocol based VLAN This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the switch The Protocol based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 20 appears Protocol to Group Mapping Table Auto refresh O Figure 4 6 20 Protocol to Group Mapping Table page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check thi
539. y index 1 16 Example Delete access management ID 1 WGSW 24040 gt security switch access delete 1 Security Switch Access Lookup Description Lookup access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Lookup lt access_id gt Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 Example Lookup access management entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch access lookup 1 Security Switch Access Clear Description Clear access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Clear Example 391 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Clear access management entry WGSW 24040 gt security switch access clear Security Switch Access Statistics Description Show or clear access management statistics Syntax Security Switch Access Statistics clear Parameters clear Clear access management statistics Example Show access management statistics WGSW 24040 gt security switch access statistics Access Management Statistics Receive Discard Receive Discard Receive Discard 0 0 Receive 0 0 0 0 0 0 Discard 0 Receive 0 Discard Security Switch SNMP Configuration Description Show SNMP configuration Syntax Security Switch SNMP Configuration Security Switch SNMP Mode Description 392 Set or show the SNMP mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP disable Disable SNMP
540. ym for Cisco Discovery Protocol D DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator 960 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a ne
541. ype 0x0600 Oxffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff e Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 Note special character and underscore _ are not allowed e Adding a New Group to Click Add New Entry to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is VLAN mapping entry added to the table Frame Type Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new entry Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Click to refresh the page immediately 133 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 4 6 15 Protocol based VLAN Mambership This page allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch The Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table screen in Figure 4 6 21 appears Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table Port Members ATA rem Delete Group Name vran 10 2J3 a 5 0 7 e 9 00 12 19 0 05 10 17 19 19 20 2122 29 24 IM ro tes O O O OO OO Mo Group entries Auto refresh LL Figure 4 6 21 Group Name to VLAN

User`s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R 1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents